JP2020121048A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress a decrease in an interest of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine, at least either a first game state or a second game state can be generated after a special game state is over. Game control means controls execution of a first variable display game on the basis that a first start condition is satisfied, controls execution of a second variable display game on the basis that a second start condition is satisfied, and can put the first variable display game and the second variable display game in a same execution state. Performance control means can preferentially execute a first performance related to the first variable display game in the first game state, can preferentially execute a second performance related to the second variable display game in the second game state, and can preferentially execute the second performance related to the second variable display game even in the first game state under a prescribed condition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 137

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a player can be provided with a gaming value when a variable display game result is a special result.

In the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to put both the first variable display game (for example, Toku-zu 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (for example, Toku-zu 2 variable display game) into the running state. There is a so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-148127, A

However, in such a gaming machine, in a predetermined game state, if an effect related to one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, which is the main variation, is fixedly executed, it becomes flexible. The production could not be executed, and there was a risk that the interest in the game would decline.

It is an object of the present invention to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a game control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed on a display device based on establishment of a start condition, and an effect capable of executing an effect associated with the variable display game. In a gaming machine that is provided with a control means and is capable of generating a special game state in which a game value can be given to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, after the special game state ends, At least one of the first game state and the second game state can be generated, and the game control means controls the execution of the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and the second start condition Execution control of the second variable display game is performed based on the establishment, and it is possible to bring both the first variable display game and the second variable display game into a running state, and the effect control unit is configured to: In the first gaming state, the first effect related to the first variable display game can be prioritized and executed, and in the second gaming state, the second effect related to the second variable display game can be prioritized. Execution is possible, and under a predetermined condition, the second effect related to the second variable display game can be preferentially executed even in the first gaming state.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game control device. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fraud & winning a prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of a prize number counter update processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of production command setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is another time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is still another time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure starting mouth 1 switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure starting opening 2 switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special processing 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the outfall probability. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing of 2 bytes. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of high probability variation frequency update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 1 transition process shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 change process shift setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in special figure 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during a special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 display process transfer setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 1 in-display process transfer setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 display process transfer setting process 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the processing during a special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the processing during the special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing during fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special movement 1 small hit fanfare inside processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 small hit fanfare inside process transfer setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during a special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 2 during a special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during the opening of the special winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of design fluctuation control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of external information edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of a symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 game process. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of processing during a change in special figure 1. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of processing during special figure 2 change. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 big hit termination process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 big hit ending process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 small hit completion process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 small hit termination process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the first half of single command system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows the latter half of single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change interruption setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation restart setting process. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of change suspension setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation restart setting process. 11 is a time chart (timing chart) showing how the variable display game is forcibly terminated. 9 is a time chart showing how the variable display game is interrupted/restarted. (A) It is a time chart which shows the case where the variation time timer of the special figure 2 variable display game is updated when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. (B) It is a time chart which shows the case where it is not updated. (A) is a time chart showing a state in which a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the special display 1 variable display game is not set. (B) is a time chart showing how to set a delay timer (wait time) that delays the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game. (A) is a time chart showing how the delay timer (wait time) of the special figure 2 variable display game is set regardless of the state of variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game. (B) is a time chart showing how a delay timer (wait time) for delaying restart of the variable display game is not set. It is a time chart which shows processing when there is a possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will end at the same timing. It is a time chart showing an example of a process when a power failure occurs during interruption of the variable display game and the power failure is restored (power on) thereafter. It is a time chart which shows another example of the processing when there is a power failure during the interruption of the variable display game and then the power failure is restored (power on). It is a front view of a game board provided in the game machine in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a table which illustrates the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the outfall probability, and the probability variation probability in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the high probability change frequency update processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the number of times of time saving change update processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 1st flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flow chart which shows the modification of the special map 2 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 2nd flow chart which shows the modification of the special map 2 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of general-purpose game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing during normal figure change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in the figure. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric power operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric ball remaining process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the end processing per ordinary figure. It is a time chart of the operation of the first special variation winning device in the small hit RUSH. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure starting opening 2 switch processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 usual processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop design setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (the latter half part) during a special figure 1 display concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 production mode information check processing which relates to 3rd execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 display process (second half part) which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 production mode information check processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare/interval process shift setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special map 1 big hit end processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of transition (transition, change) of the effect mode according to the third embodiment. FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of the variation time according to the third embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which shows the transition of the screen of a display apparatus when it changes from the small hit RUSH mode of a probability change state to a normal mode through a special mode. It is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board in a modification of the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 production mode information check processing which relates to the deformation example of 3rd execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 production mode information check processing concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit completion process which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit termination process which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a 1st flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a 2nd flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of shift (transition, change) of the production mode concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of the variation time according to the modified example of the third embodiment. In a modification of 3rd Embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which shows the transition of the screen of a display apparatus when it changes from a time saving state (time saving mode) to a normal mode through a special mode.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[First Embodiment]
[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged at the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

At the center and the left side of the upper part of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light according to the game state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 is provided that extends in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side). The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the projection effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

In addition, the production pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also during operation of the production operation device by the player.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a short-time state as a specific gaming state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probability change state, probability change state, high probability state), big hit state (Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variation state is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (number cut type, ST), and a predetermined probability falling lottery. There are things that continue until you are won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, a probability variation state may always be generated when a big hit occurs, or a winning device or the like having a specific area is provided and specified. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) of launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be performed in various launching modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat board-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window serving as a display area of a variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, the center case 40 is provided with a warp passage 40a for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. Has been. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b is the first starting winning opening 36 or 2 It is easy to win the start winning hole 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a first starting winning opening (first starting winning area, special drawing 1 starting opening, starting opening 1) 36 for giving a starting condition (starting condition) of the special figure variation display game 36. Is provided. At the time of left hitting (normal hitting), the game ball easily wins (wins) in the first start winning opening 36. In the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a second start winning opening (second starting winning area, special figure 2 starting opening, starting opening 2) 37 is provided. When hitting to the right, the game ball becomes easier to win (ball) in the second starting winning opening 37. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

In the game area 32 below the second starting winning opening 37, an upper-side winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) is pivoted in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to open the lower winning opening. A first special variation winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and By facilitating the inflow of the game balls into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, in the lower special winning opening, a lower special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

Further, in the game area 32 on the upper left side of the center case 40, the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) is pivoted in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to open the upper special winning opening. A second special variation winning device 39 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 39c is provided. The second special variation winning device 39, like the first special variation winning device 38, changes from a state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a player) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. It is designed to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player by converting the game state into an advantageous game state) and facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper special winning opening. In addition, inside the special winning opening, a special winning opening switch 39a (see FIG. 3) (two in the present embodiment) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

A game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the lower special winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38, and the upper special winning opening of the second special floating winning device 39. Then, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the first special variation winning device 38, there is provided an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.

Further, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 game), special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 A collective display device 50 for executing the game)) is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units D1 to D20 that display information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like, and is a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variable display game. The fluctuation display section 52 (special figure 2 display) (lamp D2). In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display portion 53 (lamps D3 to D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38 and 39) and the occurrence of a small hit, and a special figure 1 variation display. A memory display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold display device) (lamps D11 to D14) for informing the number of stored (start) games is stored.

Further, on the collective display device 50, a first game state display section 55 (first game state indicator, probability state display section) (lamps D15-D18) that indicates that the winning probability state is a high probability state. ), when a big hit or a small hit occurs, the second game state display section 56 (second game state indicator) (lamps D8-D10) that lights up and informs that it is right-handed (when it should be right-handed) It is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 corresponds to a modified example described later, and the third game state display unit 57 (third game state display) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended. Device, interruption status display portion) (lamps D19, D20).

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the special figure variation display game will be described. In addition, in the present embodiment, the general-purpose starting gate is not provided, and the so-called general-purpose variable display game is not executed. The second starting winning opening 37 is not provided with a movable member that opens and closes the second starting winning opening 37.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball toward a game area 32 from a ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second The winning award 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is won, or it flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, the type of the winning opening won. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 through the payout device.

As a basic way of playing, in the normal game state, the player makes a left-hand hit and puts a game ball into the first start winning opening 36 to start the special figure 1 variable display game, such as a small hit/big hit or a probability change state. Due to the occurrence of, the player switches to right hitting and aims at the second starting winning opening 37 and the special winning opening. The display device 41 can display an instruction for instructing whether the player should hit left or right, and when the player does not follow the instruction, an error is notified by the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b. It is possible.

The winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special display 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment), and the second starting winning opening. The game balls that win the prize 37 are detected as the starting prize balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit (1 in the present embodiment).

At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, and each variation pattern random value are extracted. These random numbers are stored in a special figure reservation storage area (part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure start winning memory (special figure starting memory) for a predetermined number of times (for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the maximum value). It is stored up to 4 times. The storage number of the special figure 1 starting prize winning memory (special figure 1 starting memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 for informing the number of starting winning prizes of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game can be in the execution state (running) at the same time independently of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 starting prize during the display game execution or the big hit is invalidated (the detection of the starting opening 2 switch 37a is invalidated). Accordingly, the special figure 2 starting prize memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is not substantially accumulated, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started immediately when the special figure 2 starting prize memory is generated. That is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not being played at the timing when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the variation start condition (starting condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game is satisfied. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 starting prize storage number is not displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41. It should be noted that it is also possible to have a configuration in which the special figure 2 starting prize winning memory number is displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 or the second starting memory. To do.

In the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, identification information (special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), special symbol 2 (special symbol 2)) is displayed on the special symbol 1 indicator 51 and the special symbol 2 indicator 52. Is variably displayed and then a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed independently (at the same time) simultaneously (both). When it occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and stopped and displayed), the other special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped by the outlier result.

When a game ball is won in the second start winning opening 37 in the normal game state by hitting the right, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, but basically a long time fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes) Since it is performed, during this period, it is forcibly disengaged and stopped by a big hit or a small hit that occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, for example, decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of numbers or the like are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling is started in a predetermined order, the changing symbols are stopped in sequence after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are displayed for the purpose of improving the interest.

When the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result, a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 and/or the second special variation winning device 39 are activated by energizing the lower special winning opening solenoid (38b) and/or the upper special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). The special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or tens of seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is wide open until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player plays many game balls. The privilege of being able to acquire is given.

When the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display As a result of the game, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 and/or the second special variation winning device 39 are activated by energizing the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and/or the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). Is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less). In addition, the total opening time of the special winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so in the small hit state, the player can obtain a game more than in the big hit state. There is little value (number of balls acquired). In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the special winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation state, there is a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which a small hit frequently occurs due to the short-to-short variation Toku-zu 2 variable display game and a large number of prize balls are obtained by the small hit. Become. Then, in the small hit rush, the first special variation winning device 38 and/or the second special variation winning device 39 are opened with high frequency.

Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

The big hit is a special result involving the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result not involving the operation of the condition device. The condition device is a device that operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38 and/or second special variable winning device 39) is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, the special variation winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

In the present embodiment, in all types of jackpots, the jackpot state shifts to the probability variation state after the jackpot state ends, and the probability variation state continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 50) of variable display games are executed after the jackpot completion. .. That is, the gaming machine 10 is an ST (special time) machine, and the jackpot symbols are only probability variation symbols. On the other hand, after the small hit state (shorter time than the big hit state) ends, the game state returns to the original state before the start of the small hit state. Note that the jackpot probability is low in the jackpot state, but the jackpot probability before the start of the jackpot state is maintained in the jackpot state (the probability state does not change in the jackpot). Therefore, the big hit probability is maintained at a high probability (probability change state) throughout the small hit RUSH state.

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are configured as separate display devices, and both of the special figure variable display games may simultaneously be in the running state (running state). When a big hit or a small hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (the special result or the specific result is derived and stopped and displayed), the other special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly set to the off result. Stop.

Regarding the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In addition, the decoration special figure variation display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may both be in the execution state (execution state) at the same time, When a big hit or a small hit occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and is stopped and displayed), the other decorative special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the off result.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (38a, 39a) uses a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been done. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine. Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 included therein, an input unit 120 including an input port, an output unit 130 including an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic parts such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for informing the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate substrates or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (in particular, the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed, and have already been derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state where the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N reach) and a special 1 reach (SP1 reach) are provided as a reach effect system in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected degree is different). , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The expectation of the effect (notice) indicates the probability of a big hit when the effect is selected, and the selection rate of the effect when it is a big hit and the effect of the effect when it is not a big hit (when it is out of sync). It can be calculated based on the selectivity or the like.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining a big hit random number for determining a big hit in the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit for generating random numbers for pattern random numbers, fluctuation patterns in special display variable display games (including execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. ..

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure variation display game game result (big hit or miss), the special figure variation display game probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) as the current gaming state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation allocation information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win the prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball payout request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, and a second start winning opening 37. Starting port 2 switch 37a, winning a prize switch 35a, first special variable winning a prize device 38 lower special award opening switch 38a, second special variable award device 39 upper special winning a prize mouth switch 39a is connected, supplies from these switches There is provided an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for inputting a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a are the third input port 124. To be entered.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Signals are input from the switch 63, the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12, and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in the overflow switch signal and the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation handle 24 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full).

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which the noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine, which is an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that it is in the impossible state is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-injection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a solenoid (lower special winning prize solenoid) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (upper special winning prize) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening/closing data of the solenoid 39b is provided.

Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signals of the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and a fourth that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive method is performed by causing a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V and drawing out a current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit/receive data to/from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is supplied with power from a program ROM 321 including a program executed by the CPU (production control program) and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding stored contents, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 which is a time keeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decoration lamp, and drives the motor. Performs processing such as drive control of solenoids and control of production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through the command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, the effect control command signal (effect command) To receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41).

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct-current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signals) to put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

The start winning award (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the second starting winning opening 37, and based on the starting memory, the big hit determination disorder of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored. Numerical values are extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b to judge whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37). Make a means.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and also displays the special game state (big hit). State) is generated. In the process of generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111a opens the opening/closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 with the special winning opening solenoid 38b or moves the second special variation winning device 39 with the special winning opening solenoid 39b. The member 39c is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening.

Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round is to open the special winning opening until one of the conditions is achieved, and this is repeated for a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times, 8 times, 4 times or 2 times) control (cycle game) )I do. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result (a big hit result in the present embodiment) in the special figure variation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state (low probability state). In addition, the high probability state is determined based on the result mode of either the special figure variable display game (first special figure variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). Even so, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special figure variation display game is controlled to be short. In the present embodiment, the high-probability state and the short-time state are configured to occur at the same time, but it is also possible to generate them independently and to generate only one of them.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6 which is performed in a predetermined time period (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flow chart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented by "A***" or "S***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power-on delay timer, a sub-control unit (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the program starts normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like which is not a validity determination target) which is not a target of a RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time elapses, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting the waiting time elapses, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the waiting time elapses. Need to continue. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

When the power-on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of measuring the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, two times) to check by checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus ( A1008), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. The determination is made (A1010). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to step A1009 for determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine. Wait until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when the power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). When the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read/write RWM (read/write) such as RAM or EEPROM. Access to the memory is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 previously read whether the initialization switch is turned on (A1016).

When the initialization switch is off (result of A1016 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data. Yes (A1017). If it is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (A1020). If the checksums match (result of A1020 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A1021 of FIG. 5B, and the process for normal recovery (recovery) from the power failure is executed.

Further, when the initialization switch is ON (result of A1016 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1023 of FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make up.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area (payout busy signal flag area) that stores the status of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the status of the payout busy signal is changed. It is set to an undefined state indicating that it is not fixed.

And the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. The commands at the time of power failure recovery include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command indicating the number of special figure 1 held, a probability information command indicating the probability state, a command for screen designation, etc. .. The command for designating the screen is a command for designating the display content of the display device 41. For example, in the case where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are normally processed (when they are neither changing nor hitting). Is the command for the customer waiting demo, and in other cases it is the command for the recovery screen.

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery is, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (as backed up in the RWM, as in a modified example of FIGS. 63 to 69B described later). In the case where there is a special figure game interruption flag), the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted or the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted Good.

On the other hand, when executing the processing of step A1023 after executing steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibition area to access permission (A1023). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command for RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the process of step A1028. The commands at the time of RAM initialization include a model designation command, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command, and the like. In response to the RAM initialization command, the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the screen of the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization by the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b. Perform (for example, 30 seconds).

The command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1022 and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1027 further include an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode and a time saving state depending on the model. A time saving information command indicating the number of remaining games in is included.

The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1028). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1028, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2)) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1030), and interruption is permitted (A1031). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes initial value random number updating processing for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) having the same cycle.

Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be a random method update in which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process of step A1032, the game control device 100 sets the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (A1033), and the power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (A1034). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1034 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1032. That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (A1031) before the initial value random number updating process (A1032), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being stressed by making the value random number update processing wait.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process of step A1032 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to prevent the update process from being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process. There is an advantage that it simplifies the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (result of A1034 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1033. The determination is made (A1035). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (result of A1035 is “N”), the process returns to step A1034 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 once interrupts when the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1036), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A1037).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1038) and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1039). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the process stands by until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the activation of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) which can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section being operated. It is provided with an initialization unit (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) is executed (A1304). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. ..

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1305), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1306), a random number update. Processing 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower special winning opening switch 38a, and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are monitored for whether or not there is a normal signal input, and for error monitoring. A winning opening switch/state monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is executed (A1308).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning in the starting opening through the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A1309). Next, the special figure 1 game process for performing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1310), and the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game process is executed (A1311). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED edit process for driving the segment LEDs for displaying the special figure variation game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents. (A1312).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet irregularity monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1313). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1314).

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1315). The details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that when the timer interrupt process returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank designation is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing process. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning to the register bank 0 or the processing for returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

First, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper special winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the upper special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) (A2001). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, it is monitored whether or not there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening, and the fraud & prize monitoring processing for detecting a normal winning is executed (A2002). Details of the fraud & winning award monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the fraud monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, a fraud The information on the winning number upper limit value (the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations), the winning port monitoring table, and the notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. Further, in the winning prize port monitoring table, information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter region 1 and the address of the winning number counter region 2 is defined. The fraud monitoring table and the winning hole monitoring table are prepared for each switch to be monitored.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower special winning opening switch 38a in the lower special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (A2003). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process of monitoring the fraudulent prize and detecting the normal prize is executed (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) capable of always winning (A2005 ), the winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2006).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process (A2007). In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation number) is counted as the abnormal fluctuation number in the normal game state (at the time of low probability), and the abnormal fluctuation number is a prescribed value ( For example, when 5) is reached, the effect control device 300 is caused to perform error notification. Details of the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 11.

Next, the game control device 100 updates a state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among a plurality of switches and signals whose states should be monitored is to be monitored this time (A2008). ). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2009). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2010). Details of the gaming machine status check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shooting ball running out error) based on the shoot ball running out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set up. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormal status signal (payout abnormal error) Monitoring is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the illegal radio wave signal (frame illegal radio wave) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2013). Then, when the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2013 is "N"), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (result of A2013 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2014), and whether an error has occurred, etc. The gaming machine status check processing for determining the status of is executed (A2015).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process of setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2016). ), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

Note that the processing from steps A2014 to A2016 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, and therefore is executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2014 to A2016 is performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud & prize monitoring processing. The fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is executed in steps A2002 and A2004 in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The fraud & winning prize monitoring process is a process performed on the lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a of the second special variation winning device 39. With regard to the special winning opening (special variation winning devices 38, 39), it is easy to illicitly open the opening/closing member to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball. ..

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch which is the error monitoring target (A2101), and determines whether or not it is in the fraud monitoring period (A2102). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variation winning a prize device 38 is opened when the winning prize switch of the error monitoring target is the lower special winning prize switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variable winning a prize device 39 is opened when the winning prize switch to be error monitored is the upper special winning prize switch 39a.

Then, in the fraud monitoring period (result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). In addition, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (A2104), and it is determined whether the number of illegal winnings after addition is illegal to be monitored. It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than the number (for example, 5) (A2105).

The reason why the number of judgments is 5 is that, for example, when the special winning opening in the open state is converted into the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the special winning opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent it from being determined to be fraudulent when a player has won a prize or when a signal has noise, and to prevent it from being easily discriminated as an error even if it is not fraudulent.

And when it is not more than the determined number (the result of A2105 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or more than the determined number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the fraud occurrence determination number (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area. (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraud generating command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud prize generating flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of a target winning opening switch (A2110) and sets prize balls. The counter updating process is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112) and determines whether or not there is permission to update the notification timer (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is "N"), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when updating of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), −1 is updated if the target notification timer is not 0 (A2114). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch for error monitoring is one upper special winning port switch 39a, and is permitted when the winning port switch for error monitoring is the other upper special winning port switch 39a. Not done. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as often with regard to the injustice notification of the second special variation winning device 39, and prevents the time from being increased by half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). .. In addition, when the winning prize switch of the error monitoring target is the lower special winning prize switch 38a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & winning award monitoring process. When the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (A2116) and the fraud flag is set. A fraudulent prize release flag is prepared as (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

In addition, the game control device 100, after the process of step A2119 is completed, or when the value of the notification timer has not become 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize monitoring process before the last time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the fraud & prize monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and the command setting process is executed. Is executed (A2122). After that, the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends.

By the above process, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the occurrence of fraud, and the fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in response to the fraud cancellation, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winning prize counter update processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning number counter updating process. The prize number counter updating process is executed in step A2111 of the fraud & prize monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first obtains the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (to be exact, a change in the input) in the target winning opening switch. (A2202). If there is no input (result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2212).

On the other hand, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203), and loads the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). Further, it is determined whether or not overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2205).

When the overflow has not occurred (result of A2205 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 ends or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2209). If no overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the processing of step A2206 ends, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "Y"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2212).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not finished (result of A2212 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2202 which determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2212 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is completed. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Production command setting process]
Drawing 10 is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production command setting processing for setting the production command transmitted to production control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first reads the status of the production serial transmission buffer (A2301). Further, it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

If the transmission buffer is not full (result of A2302 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

When the transmission buffer is full (result of A2302 is “Y”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2301.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 reads the status of the production serial transmission buffer (A2304) and determines whether the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (result of A2305 is "Y"), the process returns to step A2304.

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (result of A2305 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets production command. The process ends.

As described above, by transmitting the production command to the production control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the load on the game control device 100 and make the analysis of the production command difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the load can be reduced.

[Special figure 2 Abnormal variation monitoring processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process. The special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing is executed in step A2007 in the winning a prize switch/state monitoring processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A2401). As will be described later, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 variation display game starts with a low probability of winning (including a normal gaming state). If the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (result of A2401 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A2402) and updates the special figure 1 fluctuation number by +1 ( Only 1 is added) (A2403). Then, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 is smaller than a specified value (for example, 18) (A2404). When the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (result of A2404 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation number is equal to or more than the specified value (the result of A2404 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) if the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not 0 (A2405). , Toku-zu 1 The number of fluctuations is cleared to 0 (A2406).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A2407). When the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (result of A2407 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2410. As will be described later, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set each time the special figure 2 variation display game starts with a low probability of winning (including the normal gaming state).

When the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A2408) and updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation count by +1. (A2409). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 5) (A2410).

If the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is equal to or more than the specified value (the result of A2410 is "N"), the game control device 100 subtracts the special figure 2 abnormal variation number from the specified value used for the determination in step A2410 by one. (A2411). Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is set to the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer as an error notification timer (A2412), and a special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag indicating occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal change is prepared ( (A2413), a special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is prepared as an effect command (A2414), and the process proceeds to step A2419.

When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2410 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer by -1 (A2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer has timed up (A2416). If the time has not expired (result of A2416 is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process is ended.

When the time is up (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation canceling flag (A2417), and prepares a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation canceling command as an effect command (A2418). .. Next, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the current value in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (A2419). When the prepared flag is the same as the current value in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (the result of A2419 is "Y"), the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing is ended.

When the prepared flag is different from the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (the result of A2419 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag. Is determined (A2420). If the prepared flag is not the release flag (result of A2420 is “N”), the process moves to step A2422.

When the prepared flag is the release flag (result of A2420 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 clears the special figure 2 abnormal variation number to 0 (A2421). That is, when the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag is set in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (A2417), the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared to 0. To do. After that, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area in the RWM (A2422). That is, when the prepared flag is different from the flag in the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area, the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area is rewritten with the prepared flag. Next, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2423), and the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process is ended.

When a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, an external information editing process described later is performed. Causes the security signal to be output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the effect control device 300 receives the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command as an effect command, the effect control device 300 notifies the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b of the error.

In the normal game state (the probability of a big hit being low), the player usually hits the left with a second start winning opening 37 rather than a winning in the first starting winning opening 36. When the player wins more to win the game (when the probability of a small hit is high), the player may aim at the second start winning hole 37 by right-handing. In this case, the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed by the winning in the second starting winning opening 37, and an error is notified to the player to stop the right hit. In the normal game state, when left-handed play is performed, processing is performed according to a normal route such as the dotted line in FIG. 11, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command (that is, error notification) does not occur, Fig. 2 The abnormal change notification timer also does not start.

The special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring processing will be further described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 12A to 12C. 12A to 12C exemplify the results of the above-mentioned Toku-zu 2 abnormal change monitoring processing.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed a plurality of times in the normal game state (the probability of winning is low), and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches a prescribed value (here, 5) (A2410). Result is “N”), the initial value (60 seconds) of the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer and the special figure 2 abnormal change generation command can be set (A2412, A2414), and the special figure 2 abnormal change generation command is received The control device 300 can start notification of an error using the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

After that, since the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted by 1 from the specified value (here, 5) (A2411), unless the special figure 2 variation check flag is set again, from the next special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process. Toku-zu 2 The abnormal change notification timer is continuously updated by -1 to measure the time (the result of A2410 is "Y"). The effect control device 300 can continue error notification until the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer times out due to the lapse of the period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value and the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is received. The prize balls are paid out even during the error notification.

During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information is output to the external information terminal 71, an error occurrence can be notified to an external device such as a hall computer, and when performing a test shooting test, the test shooting test device is played. Machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process described later).

If the number of abnormal fluctuations of special figure 2 reaches the specified value (5 in this case) again while the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is timing (error is being notified), the initial value of special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is reset again. After being set, error notification for 60 seconds can be started (timer reset). When a big hit occurs (start), a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancel command is transmitted, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number, the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer, and the special figure 1 variation number are cleared to 0 (the special figure display described later). Medium processing, fanfare/interval intermediate processing transition setting processing).

Further, in FIG. 11, the fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure fluctuation display game is started in the low probability state, but the fluctuation check flag is in the low probability state and there is a winning at the starting winning opening. The control may be performed as set in some cases. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12B, control is performed using the number of winnings instead of the number of fluctuations, and in the normal game state, there are a plurality of winnings (special drawing 2 winnings) to the second start winning port 37, FIG. 2 When the number of abnormal prizes reaches a prescribed value (here, 5), error notification can be started.

In the control of FIG. 11, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is set to 0 (A2421) after the error notification by the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is finished, as shown in FIG. 12B. FIG. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations (the number of abnormal prizes) may be maintained at a specified value.

In FIG. 12C, when the Toku-zu 1 variation number has reached the specified value (here, 18) (result of A2404 is “N”), the Toku-zu 2 abnormal variation number is updated by −1 to decrease from 4 to 3, for example. (A2405), the situation where the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 and changes from 18 to 0 is shown (A2406). As described above, in the normal game state (the probability of hit is low), even if the special figure 2 variation display game is executed multiple times by right-handing and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number increases, the player makes left-handing. After returning (stopping the right-handed stroke) and the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 reaches a specified value, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Toku-zu 2 decreases and the error notification can be avoided.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status check processing. The gaming machine status check processing is executed in steps A2010, A2012 and A2015 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning port switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2502). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2502 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2503) and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2504). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state off flag indicates a normal state regarding an error system signal, and indicates a state without touch regarding a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2506), acquires a target state on command, and prepares. Yes (A2507). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2508). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state regarding an error-related signal, and indicates a state with a touch regarding a touch switch signal.

When the processing of step A2505 or step A2508 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2509). If they do not match (result of A2509 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2510), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2511).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2512). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2513). When the updated value of the state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2513 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2513 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value − It remains at a value of 1 (A2514). Further, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2515). If they match (the result of A2515 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (result of A2515 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. Yes (A2516). Finally, effect command setting processing for setting effect commands is executed (A2517), and the gaming machine state check processing is ended. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning award monitoring table for monitoring the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a winning opening winning combination in the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, when there is no starting mouth winning (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a low probability state (A2704), when there is a starting mouth winning in the first starting winning prize 36 (the result of A2703 is “Y”). .. If it is in the low probability state (including during the normal gaming state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2707.

When the probability of occurrence of a hit is not in the low probability state (when it is in the high probability state) (result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a right-handing instruction notification command as a production command (A2705), and produces. Command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display the right-handing instruction display for instructing the right-handing as a warning on the display device 41 when the first start winning opening 36 has a starting mouth winning combination in a high probability state. it can.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting opening 1 switch processing (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting opening 2 winning award monitoring table for monitoring the winning at the second starting winning opening (starting opening 2) 37 (A2709), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. Yes (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a winning opening winning combination in the second starting winning opening 37 (A2711). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high-probability state (that is, a probability variation state) when there is a start-winning prize in the second start-winning prize hole 37 (the result of A2711 is “Y”). A determination is made (A2712). When it is not in the high-probability state (when it is in the low-probability state) (result of A2712 is “N”), it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit state (A2713). When it is not in the big hit state (the result of A2713 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is being made (A2714). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high-probability final fluctuation flag set in the high-probability fluctuation number update processing described later.

Here, the high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation) is a final special-character fluctuation display game when the special-character fluctuation display game starts in a high-probability state, for example, ST (special time). This is the final special figure fluctuation display game in the case where the high probability state is maintained for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of fluctuation starts after the big hit ends in the machine.

If the high-probability final fluctuation is not occurring (result of A2714 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handing instruction notification command as an effect command (A2715), and executes effect command setting processing (A2716). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays a left-handing instruction display for instructing left-handing on the display device 41 as a warning when there is a starting mouth winning in the second starting winning opening 37 during the normal gaming state. You can

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by winning in the second starting winning opening 37 (starting opening 2) (A2717), and executes special figure starting opening 2 switch processing (A2718). ), the start port switch monitoring process ends. The game control device 100 is in the high-probability state (result of A2712 is “Y”), in the big hit state (result of A2713 is “Y”), in the high-probability final fluctuation (result of A2714). Is “Y”), the left hitting instruction notification command is not prepared, and the processes of steps A2717 and A2718 are executed.

[Special figure start opening 1 switch processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port 1 switch process (A2708) in the aforementioned starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 1 switch process.

The game control device 100 first loads the number of times the starting port 1 signal is output, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 1 switch 36a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 (A2901). Further, the loaded value of the output number of the starting port 1 signal is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903).

When the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start mouth 1 signal output count area of the RWM (A2904). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is executed without executing the process of step A2904.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure suspension (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 1 switch 36a is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A2905). If the number of reserved special maps is not less than the upper limit value (result of A2905 is “N”), the special map starting port 1 switch process is ended.

When the special figure reservation number is less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906) and updates the special figure 1 reservation number by +1. Yes (A2907). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2909). ). Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2910), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911). Furthermore, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2912). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) corresponding to the RWM ( A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 executes special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, pre-determination processing) for determining special figure reservation information (A2914), and the decoration special figure 1 reservation number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number. The command is prepared as an effect command (A2915), effect command setting processing is executed (A2916), and the special figure starting port 1 switch processing ends. Details of the special figure reservation information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port 2 switch process (A2718) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch process.

The starting port 2 signal output frequency, which is the number of times the information on the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 37a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (A3001). further,
The value of the output number of the starting port 2 signal loaded is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A3003).

When the output count does not overflow (result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start mouth 2 signal output count area of the RWM (A3004). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid, that is, whether the detection of the starting opening 2 switch 37a is invalid (A3005). In addition, during the big hit variation / small hit variation stop (during the special figure display process described later), during the big hit state (from the big hit variation stop to the big hit end processing described later), during the small hit state (from the small hit variation stop If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (changing) until the small hit end process described later), even if there is a game ball entering the second start winning opening 37, the second start is performed. It is treated as if there was no prize in the prize hole 37 and is invalidated. When the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid (the result of A3005 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the special figure starting opening 2 switch process.

On the other hand, when the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalid (result of A3005 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 holding number to 1 (A3006). Although the special figure 2 variable display game is started immediately after the special figure 2 start-up memory is generated, the special figure 2 hold number is set to 1 for the purpose of control. Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 starting storage (A3007), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A3008). ..

Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (A3009), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3010). Furthermore, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3011). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas (variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM (A3012), and the special figure starting port The two-switch process ends.

As described above, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started as soon as the special figure 2 starting memory is generated, the special figure starting port 2 switch process is different from the special figure starting port 1 switch process. The special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, pre-determination processing) is not performed, and the decorative special figure 2 reservation number command is not prepared.

As described above, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, and extracts the predetermined random number from the variation display game. The starting prize storing means stores a predetermined number as an upper limit of the starting memory which is an execution right. In addition, the starting winning prize storing means (game control device 100) has a first starting memory (up to a predetermined number (for example, 4)) of various random number values extracted based on winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 36. Special figure 1 starting memory, special figure 1 starting winning memory), and various random number values extracted based on winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 37 are set to a predetermined number (here, 1) as the upper limit. It is stored as 2 start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 start prize memory).

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2914) in the special figure starting port 1 switch process described above will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, predetermination processing). The special figure reservation information determination processing is executed only for the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3101). If it is not in the high probability state (result of A3101 is “N”), it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit state (A3102). When it is not in the big hit state (the result of A3102 is "N"), the big hit determination process is executed based on the big hit random number value stored as the first starting memory (A3103).

When the high probability state (the result of A3101 is “Y”) or the big hit state (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the special figure holding information determination process does not perform the big hit determination process. The process ends as it is (preliminary determination (prefetch) is not performed).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3104). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3104 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (A3105), and big hit stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (A3106), and step A3111 Process shifts to.

When the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (in the case of a hit) (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the small hit determination process based on the big hit random number value stored as the first starting memory. It is executed (A3107), and it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit (A3108). In this embodiment, a big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (the result of A3108 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information of the small hit (A3109), and if the determination result is not a small hit (A3108). The result is “N”), and the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3110).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information as an effect command (A3111), and executes an effect command setting process (A3112). Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (A3113) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variable display game. The variation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed. Then, the look-ahead variation pattern commands corresponding to the first half variation number and the second half variation number are prepared as effect commands (A3115), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3116).

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3201). Special Figure 2 When it is neither in the big hit state or the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3201 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3202). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3203). The special processing 1 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by the -1 update. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the big hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the process of step A3203 is performed without performing the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). If the special processing 1 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3204 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3219.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 assigns the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3205). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3206). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 1 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3207).

When the game process number is “0” in step A3207, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and sets the variation start and effect of the special figure 1 variable display game. Alternatively, the special figure 1 normal process for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 changing process is executed (A3208). The details of the special figure 1 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "1" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process. The special figure 1 changing process is executed (A3209). The details of the processing during fluctuation of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

When the game processing number is “2” in step A3207, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and The special figure 1 displaying process is executed to set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of the big hit, and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing (A3210). The details of the processing during display of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the game process number is “3” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening. A fanfare/interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3211). Details of the fanfare/interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “4” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The process of opening the special winning opening is executed to set the information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3212). Details of the special winning opening opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

When the game process number is “5” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The special winning opening remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is executed (A3213). The details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “6” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) and executing the special figure 1 normal process. The special figure 1 big hit end processing which sets the setting etc. is executed (A3214). Details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "7" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets the information necessary for performing the small hitting process, etc. The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A3215). Details of the small hit fanfare processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

When the game process number is "8" in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command, a small hit setting of information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hitting process is executed (A3216). Details of the small hit mid-process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "9" in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and a special figure 1 small hit end process. The small hit remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for the execution is executed (A3217). The details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “10” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets information required for setting the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or executing the special figure 1 usual process. The special figure 1 small hitting end processing for setting etc. is executed (A3218). Details of the special figure 1 small hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process based on the special figure 1 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3219), and then displays the special figure 1 The symbol variation control process related to the container 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is ended.

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3301). Special figure 2 When it is neither in the big hit state or the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3301 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3303). The Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the big hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the process of step A3303 is performed without performing the process of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3304 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3322.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3304 is “Y”), that is, when the special control 2 game processing timer has timed up or has already timed up, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is determined whether the number of repetitions is 0 (A3305). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3305 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3306). A long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60,000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3307). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a long variation and the variation time is a long time (for example, 10 minutes), a variation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes, and therefore steps A3303-A3307 are performed. The timer value for long variation is counted by the number of times of repetition by the processing of 1, and a timer with a long variation time for the special figure 2 variable display game is prepared.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3304 is "Y") and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3305 is "Y"). The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3308). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 2 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number (A3310).

When the game process number is “0” in step A3310, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and sets the variation start and effect of the special figure 2 variable display game. Alternatively, the special figure 2 normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 changing process is executed (A3311). Details of the special figure 2 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "1" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process. The special figure 2 change process is executed (A3312). The details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “2” in step A3310, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and The special figure 2 displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of the big hit and setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is executed (A3313). The details of the processing during the display of special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “3” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening. A fanfare/interval processing for setting is executed (A3314). The fanfare/interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

If the game process number is “4” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The process of opening the special winning opening is executed to set the information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3315). The special winning opening opening process is common to the process executed in the special figure 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

When the game process number is “5” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The special winning opening remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is executed (A3316). The special winning opening remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “6” in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process ( A3317). Details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

When the game process number is “7” in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets the information necessary for performing the process during the small hit. The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A3318). The small hitting fanfare middle processing is common to the processing executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

When the game process number is “8” in step A3310, the game control device 100 performs a process for setting a small hit end command, a small hit setting for setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hitting process is executed (A3319). The small hitting process is common to the process executed in the special figure 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "9" in step A3310, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and a special figure 2 small hit ending process. The small hit remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for the execution is executed (A3320). The small hit remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

When the game process number is “10” in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3321). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game process number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3322), and then displays the special figure 2 The symbol variation control process related to the container 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A3202, A3302) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the upper special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is open (A3401), and when the upper special winning opening is not open (the result of A3401 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the remaining big ball of the upper special winning opening is being processed (A3402). When the remaining ball processing of the upper special winning opening is not being performed (the result of A3402 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is open (A3403). In the case of the big hit state or the small hit state, the upper special winning opening and/or the lower special winning opening may be open.

When the lower special winning opening is open (the result of A3403 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (A3404), and the lower large winning opening switch is set. When there is an input (the result of A3404 is “Y”), the winning prize counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening to be added in the present special winning opening switch monitoring processing is set to 1 (A3405). When the lower special winning opening is not open (the result of A3403 is “N”) or when there is no input to the lower special winning opening switch (the result of A3404 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. To do.

On the other hand, when the upper special winning opening is open (result of A3401 is “Y”), or when the upper special winning opening remaining balls are being processed (result of A3402 is “Y”). ), and the winning counter is set to 0 (A3406). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 of the upper special winning opening switches 39a (A3407), and when there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "N"). ), and proceeds to the processing of step A3411.

When there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a special winning opening count command as an effect command for effecting a prize (A3408), The effect command setting process is executed (A3409), and the winning counter is incremented by 1 (A3410).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (A3411). If there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3411 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3415. When there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3411 is “Y”), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command to perform an effect by winning (A3412), and effect command setting processing is executed. (A3413), and the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3414).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning counter is 0 (A3415), and when the winning counter is not 0 (result of A3415 is “N”), the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed. It is determined whether or not (A3416). When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3416 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (A3417). If the small hit remaining balls are not being processed (result of A3417 is "N"), the value of the winning counter (here, 1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count (A3418).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the winning counter is 0 (result of A3415 is “Y”), is in the big winning mouth remaining ball processing (result of A3416 is “Y”), or small hit remaining When the ball processing is being performed (the result of A3417 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than an upper limit value (eg, 9 playable balls in one round) (A3419), and the special winning opening count number is determined. Is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3419 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3419 is “Y”), the special winning opening count number is kept at the upper limit value (A3420) and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3421). ).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot is being opened (A3422). If the jackpot is not being opened (the result of A3422 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed. finish. When the jackpot is being opened (the result of A3422 is "Y"), the jackpot opening operation end value is saved in the jackpot control pointer area (A3423), and then the jackpot switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Special processing 1 usual processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3208) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal process of special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3501). If the special display 1 variable display game cannot start changing (if it cannot start changing) (the result of A3501 is “N”), the special processing 1 normal processing number “0” is set in the special processing 1 game processing number area of the RWM. Save (A3502). It should be noted that, here, from the end of the big hit variation of the special figure 2 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 2 big hit), and the small figure of the special figure 2 variable display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 2 small hit ending process), the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start changing.

When the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handing instruction has been informed (A3503). If the left-handing instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handing instruction has been informed. If the left-handing instruction has been notified (result of A3503 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3507.

If the left-handing instruction notification has not been issued (result of A3503 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handing instruction notification command as an effect command (A3504), executes effect command setting processing (A3505), and displays. A left-handing instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handing instruction is to be notified (displayed) by the device 41 or the like is set (A3506).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3507). When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (result of A3507 is “Y”), the special figure 1 usual process number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area of the RWM (A3502). As a result, the special figure 1 normal process is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reservations becomes 1 or more.

When the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (the result of A3507 is “N”), the game control device 100 uses the variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as an effect command. It prepares (A3508) and executes effect command setting processing (A3509). Then, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3510). After that, a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3511), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3512).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3513). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing or (special figure 1 changing+special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A3514), and when it is not in a high probability state (in a low probability state) (result of A3514 is “N”), during high probability final fluctuation. Or not (A3515). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag described later.

When the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A3515 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the special-figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A3516) and executes the special-figure 1 mid-fluctuation processing transition setting processing (A3517). ). The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is used in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 11) described above.

On the other hand, if the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A3514 is “Y”) or is in the high probability final fluctuation (result of A3515 is “Y”), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag Without setting, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is executed (A3517).

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal process of special figure 2.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3601). If the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start changing (if it cannot start changing) (the result of A3601 is “N”), the special figure 2 normal processing number “0” is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM. Save (A3602). Here, from the end of the big hit variation of the special figure 1 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 1 big hit), and the small figure of the special figure 1 variable display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 1 small hit end process), the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start changing.

When the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (the result of A3601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (A3602). Special figure 2 When the number of reservations is not 0 (the result of A3602 is "N"), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3603), Rendering command setting processing is executed (A3604). Then, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3605).

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3606). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing or (special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A3607), and if it is not in a high probability state (in a low probability state) (result of A3607 is “N”), during high probability final fluctuation. Or not (A3608). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag described later.

When the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A3608 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A3609) and executes the special figure 2 mid-fluctuation processing shift setting processing (A3610). ). The special figure 2 variation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring processing (FIG. 11).

On the other hand, if the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A3614 is “Y”) or is in the high probability final fluctuation (result of A3615 is “Y”), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag Without setting, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is executed (A3617).

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3602 is "Y"),
It is determined whether the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0 or not (A3611). When the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0 (the result of A3611 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3612). When Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A3612 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3613). If the customer waiting demo has not started (result of A3613 is “N”), the customer waiting demo flag is set (A3614).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3615) and executes an effect command setting process (A3616). The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3617). As a result, the special figure 2 normal process is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3611 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed, and therefore the RWM special feature will not be prepared without preparing a customer waiting demo command. The special figure 2 usual processing number "0" is saved in the FIG. 2 game processing number area (A3617). In addition, when the special figure 1 is changing (result of A3612 is “Y”), or when the customer waiting demonstration is already started (result of A3613 is “Y”), a customer waiting demo command is prepared, etc. Instead, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3617).

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3701). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, big hit flag 1 setting process (A3702) for setting deviation information and big hit information, special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information ) Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (A3703), special figure 1 variable display game special figure 1 information setting processing (A3704) that sets the special figure information that is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the game is executed To do.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3705). ). Next, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) that sets a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3706) that sets fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game ( A3707) is executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3708). If it is not in the high-probability state (result of A3708 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (A3709). When the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (result of A3709 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A3710).

When the special figure 2 is changing (the result of A3710 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3711 is “Y”), that is, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is within the range of the time value of the special figure 2 game processing timer. If it is, the process proceeds to step A3714.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3711 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more as a predetermined number. Is determined (A3712). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than the predetermined number (here, 4) (the result of A3712 is "N"), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated by a value of (value of special figure 2 game processing timer area+repetition count×60000 msec).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3714). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is equal to or longer than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3714 is “N”), the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is more specific. A command for notifying that it is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the variable display game shown in FIG. 2 is prepared as an effect command (A3715), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3716). If the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is equal to or longer than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, etc. The production related to the game may end suddenly. Therefore, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game to, for example, something that is not flashy so as not to give the player a feeling of strangeness.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a high-probability fluctuation number update process for updating and managing the number of fluctuations (remaining number) of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state (A3717), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. To finish.

On the other hand, in the high probability state (result of A3708 is “Y”), in the high probability final fluctuation (result of A3709 is “Y”), when the special figure 2 is not changing (result of A3710 is “ N)), the processes of steps A3711 to A3716 are not performed, and the process proceeds to step A3717.

Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (4 in this case) (the result of A3712 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game. Since (240 (=4×60) seconds or more in this case) is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is longer Without preparing, shifts to the processing of step A3717.

Furthermore, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (result of A3714 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further changes the special figure 1 variable display game. The process shifts to step A3717 without preparing a command for notifying that the variation time of is longer.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 2 information setting flag (A3801). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, big hit flag 2 setting processing (A3802) for setting deviation information and big hit information, special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information ) Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (A3803), special figure 2 information setting processing (A3804) that sets special figure information that is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game To do.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3805). ). Next, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 2 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3806) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 variable display game ( (A3807), a high-probability fluctuation number update process for updating and managing the number of fluctuations (remaining number) of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state is executed (A3808), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3702) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 25A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3901a), and saves the deviation information in the large hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3902a). Subsequently, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the RWM and prepared (A3903a). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1). Then, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3905a). If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3905a is "N"), the big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big hit random number value (A3906a). ), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907a). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907a is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved at step A3902a (A3908a), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 are prevented from being a big hit at the same time. ..

If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3905a is "Y"), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907a is "N"), the game control device 100 obtains it. Based on the big hit random number value, a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit is executed (A3909a), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit ( A3910a). In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit judgment and the big hit judgment). If the special display 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is "Y"), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3901a (A3911a), The jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not the small hit (the result of A3910a is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3802) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 25B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, the “small hit flag 1” in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 25A) is set to “small hit flag 2”, the “big hit flag 1” is set to “big hit flag 2”, and the “big hit flag 2” is set. Is replaced with "big hit flag 1" and "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2". Since the same processing as the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A3901b to A3911b in the jackpot flag 2 setting process correspond to steps A3901a to A3911a in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, respectively.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3906a, A3906b) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3103 of the special figure suspension information judging process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A4002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than big hit) as a judgment result (A4007), and ends the big hit judgment process. To do.

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A4002 is “N”), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the probability of occurrence of hit is in a high probability state (A4003). .. If it is in the high probability state (result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (result of A4003 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A4005).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3909a, A3909b) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, the big hit flag 2 setting process, and the like will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination processes in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged as a small hit.

As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) should be the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variation display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not independently provided, and the big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination. However, it is also possible to provide a unique small hit random number.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4106) and ends the small hit determination process. ..

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variable display game. Yes (A4102). Then, when information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A4102 is "Y"), a small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, if the information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game is not being set (result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4104).

After setting the small hit upper limit judgment value, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is “Y”), deviation is set as the judgment result (A4106). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is "N"), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

FIG. 28 shows a jackpot probability (probability that the determination result will be a big hit), a small hit probability (probability that the determination result will be a small hit), and a loss probability (the determination result will be a loss) by the above-described big hit determination process and small hit determination process. Probability) for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. FIG. 28A shows the probability in the low probability state, and FIG. 28B shows the probability in the high probability state.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability (probability of jackpot occurrence) is higher in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. The probability of small hit (probability of occurrence of small hit) is the same in the high-probability state and the low-probability state. The loss probability (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 2 variable display game. The deviation probability is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the deviation probability is 0 in the special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, since the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 is more advantageous to the player than the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (particularly with respect to the small hit probability), the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring processing Is executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols are only probability variation symbols, and after the jackpot state (special game state), there is no exception that the probability state is high (probability variation state), and the probability variation inrush rate is 100%. The high-probability state continues until the variable display game starts a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot is over.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4301a). When the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4301a is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4302a). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4303a), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 1 stop design save area of the RWM is saved (A4304a). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305a), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306a). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4307a), and the big winning corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 special winning mouth opening information area of the RWM (A4308a). Then, the process proceeds to step A4316a. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4301a is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is in the small hit flag 1 area. It is determined whether or not it is saved (A4309a). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4309a is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4310a). Next, the special figure 1 small hitting symbol table is set (A4311a), the stopped symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hitting symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol saving area (A4312a). By this processing, the type of specific result is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4313a). Then, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4309a is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4314a), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4315a). Then, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

After the steps A4308a, A4313a, and A4315a, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4316a). In addition, the stop symbol pattern is one of a deviating symbol, a plurality of big hit symbols (4R probability variation A2, 8R probability variation A3, 16R probability variation A1, 16R probability variation B1-B3), and a small hit symbol (special figure 1 small hit). Corresponding. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the decoration special figure 1 command as a production command in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A4317a), and executes the production command setting process (A4318a). The decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319a), and clears the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4320a). ), the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A4321a). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing.

Special figure 2 stop design setting processing, in the special figure 1 stop design setting processing (Figure 29A) "small hit flag 1" to "small hit flag 2", "big hit flag 1" to "big hit flag 2", The special figure 1" is replaced with the "special figure 2", and the same processing as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing is performed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A4301b-A4321b in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process correspond to steps A4301a-A4321a in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, respectively.

In addition, the stop symbol pattern set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is an outlier symbol, a plurality of jackpot symbols (2R probability variation D1, 4R probability variation D3, 8R probability variation E2, 16R probability variation E1, F2, F3), and a plurality. It corresponds to any of the small hit patterns (special figure 2 small hits 1-3). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the first start winning opening 36, and the game ball in the second starting winning opening 37 A variable display game executing means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection is formed. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map 1 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4401). If it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A4401 is “N”), the variation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4403).

Here, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuations, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the latter-half fluctuations. The first half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of the reach, and the second half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode after the reach state is reached and corresponds to the type of reach (including normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4404), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is "N"). ), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A4405).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the game control device 100 specially displays the latter half offset data in order to distribute the latter half variation according to the number of special figure 1 holdings. The value is updated by adding the 1-holding number and updating the value (A4406), and the value is converted by adding the 1-chart 1 holding number to the first-half offset data in order to distribute the first-half variation according to the Toku-zu 1 holding number (A4407). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (in the case of a miss) (the result of A4405 is “N”), the processing of step A4406 is not performed, and the special figure 1 hold number is added only to the first-half offset data. The value is converted (A4407).

When the result of the special display 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4404 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A4405-A4407, and the first half offset data and the second half offset acquired in step A4403. Without updating or converting the data, the process proceeds to step A4412.

On the other hand, in the high-probability state (result of A4401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4408). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4408 is “N”), the first half offset data for the off/small hit of the special figure 1 at the time of high probability is set (A4409), and the process of step A4411 Move to. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 1 at the time of high probability is set (A4410). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4411). As a result, in the high-probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game is changed for a long time. It should be noted that even if the special display 1 variable display game is a long-time fluctuation (long fluctuation), unlike the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game, 9 is not saved in the repeat count area. The long-term fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the variable display game is shorter than the long-time fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game.

After step A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4412), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information). The information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4413), and the special figure 1 information setting process is ended.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4501). If it is in the high probability state (result of A4501 is “N”), the variation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuations, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second-half fluctuations.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A4501 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A4504). .. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is "N"), the first half offset data for the off/small hit of the special figure 2 at a low probability is set (A4505), and the process of step A4507 Move to. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (result of A4504 is “Y”), the first half offset data for big hit of special figure 2 at low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4507). As a result, in the low probability state, the special figure 2 variable display game is changed for a long time (long change).

After step A4503 or A4507, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4508), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2). The data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4509), and the special figure 2 information setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the fluctuation group address table (A4601), acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 and prepares it (A4602), and the fluctuation pattern random number of special figure 1 The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from the 1 storage area (for the number of reserved 1) and prepared (A4603).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A4604). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (the result of A4604 is “Y”), 2-byte distribution processing based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605), and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment. If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604 is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606).

The structure of the second-half variation group table is different between the hitting and the deviating, and the random number for distribution has a 1-byte size for the hitting and a 2-byte size for the deviating. The hit size is 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate per hit of the special figure 1 variable display game is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the variation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605 or A4606, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is stored as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608), and distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609). .. Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4610). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first-half variation number area (A4616), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. By the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the latter half fluctuation selection address table (A4701), acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 and prepares (A4702). Then, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 to prepare (A4703), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4705). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4706), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4708). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 to prepare (A4709), and the distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first-half variation number area (A4711), and ends the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. By the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sorting process]
Next, details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4605) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4801), It is determined whether or not the code is not distributed (A4802).

Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, a part of the variable group table when the result is out of order), since distribution is not necessary, the distribution value “0”, that is, the code without distribution is defined at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (result of A4802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (A4807). ) End the 2-byte sorting process.

On the other hand, when the top data of the latter half variation group table is not a code without distribution (result of A4802 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 defines one distribution value initially defined in the latter half variation group table. Is obtained (A4803).

Next, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in the process of step A4803 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A4603 of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. And a new random number value is calculated (A4804). Further, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4805).

When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4805 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4806), and then the process of step A4803 and thereafter. To execute. That is, the distribution value defined next in the variable group selection table is acquired (A4803), the distribution value is subtracted using the random number value determined in the process of step A4805 as a new random value, and a new random value is added. Is calculated (A4804). Then, with respect to the calculated new random number value, each process is executed until it is determined in the process of step A4805 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4805 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table.

When the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the data address corresponding to the sorted result (A4807), 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution process (A4606, A4609, A4615, A4704, A4710) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of distribution processing. The distribution process is performed by selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game based on the variation pattern random number 1 from the latter half variation group table, or from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, or for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game based on the variation pattern random number 3 from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) Is.

In the game control device 100, first, the prepared first half variation group table (selection table), the second half variation selection table (selection table), and the first half variation selection table (selection table) have no distribution code (that is, " 0”) is checked (A4901), and it is determined whether the code is a code without distribution (A4902).

Here, like the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one of the latter half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern. In the case of no selection table, the distribution value “0”, that is, the code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (the result of A4902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines the distribution result. The address of the corresponding data is updated (A4907), and the distribution process ends.

On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (the result of A4902 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 determines the latter half variation group table or The first distribution value specified in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4903).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4903 from the loaded random number value (variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3) to calculate a new random number value (A4904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4905).

When the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (result of A4905 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the next distribution value (A4906), and executes the processing of step A4903 and thereafter. Execute. That is, the distribution value defined next in the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4903), and the distribution value is determined as a new random number value determined in step A4905. Subtraction is performed and a new random number value is calculated (A4904). Then, the process is executed until it is determined that the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one of the second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table.

When the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4905 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the data address corresponding to the sorted result (A4907), and the sorting process. To finish.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A5001). When the information regarding the special display 1 variable display game is being set (the result of A5001 is “Y”), the random number storage areas (for the reserved ball 1) of the used variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of special FIG. 1 are cleared (A5002). ). When the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5001 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game. The storage area is cleared (A5003).

After the steps A5002 and A5003, the game control device 100 sets the first-half variation time value table (A5004) and acquires the first-half variation time value corresponding to the first-half variation number (A5005). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5007).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A5008), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5009). Then, it is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5010). When the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5010 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, and therefore the long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game is being performed. It is determined whether or not to start (A5011).

When the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not started (result of A5011 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5012), When the long fluctuation of the two-variation display game is started (the result of A5011 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5013). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, since the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) which is not enough for the 2-byte timer is varied, the predetermined number of repetitions (9 here) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set to area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (millisecond), a 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, when a timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of times of repeating 9 times is further saved, timer interrupt processing (particularly, the special figure 2 The timer is decremented in the game process (FIG. 19) (A3303), and when the time is up (result of A3304 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3306), and the long variation timer is added to the game process timer. The value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set. As a result, it is possible to set the long fluctuation time special game 2 fluctuation display game to a long fluctuation time of 60,000 msec+(60000 msec×9)=10 minutes.

The variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game when it is not a long variation (the number of repetitions=0) are the first half variation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the information regarding the variable display game of special figure 1 is being set (result of A5010 is “Y”), the game control device 100 moves to step A5014 without setting the number of times of repetition of the timer.

After the steps A5010, A5012, and A5013, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5014), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5015). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5016).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A5017). When information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is “Y”), the special figure 1 pending number is updated by −1 (A5018), and the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 1 variable display game are updated. Is shifted (A5019), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5020). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so that the contents of the random number storage area are not shifted (see FIG. Since the number of reservations is 1, the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the starting storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about patterns are given, and these commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High probability change count update process]
Next, details of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (A3717, A3808) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing. In the high-probability variation number update processing, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the high-probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A5101). When it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A5101 is “N”), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is ended.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, it is in a low-probability state (can be set to a low-probability state by a fanfare/interval processing shift setting process described later). That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 variable display game but also the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in a low probability state, and the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. Not only the variable display game shown in FIG. 2 but also the special display variable display game is executed in a low probability state. When the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, there is a possibility of a high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state. It may be executed.

When in the high probability state (result of A5101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of special figure variation display games started in the high probability state by -1 (1 (A5102). The initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high-probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 times (to be described later in special figure 1 big hit end processing or special figure 2 big hit end processing. ). In addition, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts fluctuating, the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of times of high probability change is 0 (A5103). When the number of times of high probability variation is not 0 (result of A5103 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation number updating process is ended. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5103 is “Y”), the signal regarding the end of the high probability (off data of two big hits) is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5104). Further, a signal relating to the high probability & shortening of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5105). High probability & signal regarding the end of time saving, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation This is the off data of the time reduction state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area of the RWM (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (( (A5107), the high-probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the variation is set (A5108), and the high-probability variation number updating process is ended.

The high-probability final fluctuation flag is information for indicating that the fluctuation has started during the high probability even during the low probability. In the high-probability final change (high-probability final change), unless the probability is lowered to a low probability immediately after the start of the change, the winning judgment based on the starting mouth winning during the final change is performed with a high probability. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the high probability final fluctuation is started, the hit probability is set to a low probability by the special figure low probability & no time saving flag. Therefore, the high-probability final variation flag is set and used to determine whether or not there is a high-probability final variation (for example, in steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A3709, etc.). The high-probability final fluctuation flag also includes information that can be used to determine which of the high-probability final fluctuations in special figure 1 or special figure 2 is.

As described above, after the jackpot, the high-probability state is maintained until a predetermined number of times (the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations, for example, 50) of the variable display game is started, and the number of high-probability fluctuations becomes 0 and the predetermined number of times When the eye variation display game (high-probability final variation) is started, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set, and the low probability state ends and the time saving state ends, and the high probability final variation flag is set. Is set.

[Special figure 1 processing transition setting processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 mid-fluctuation process shift setting process (A3517) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 changing process transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets "1" as a process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 changing process (A5201a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5202a). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A5203a), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (ON data of the special symbol 1 changing signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5204a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A5205a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blinking period of the special display 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (A5206a), and the special figure 1 changing symbol number area The initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting symbol) is saved in (A5207a), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 process change setting process during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (A3610) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process.

Special figure 2 during transition processing transition setting processing, "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) in special figure 1 during transition processing transition process (Fig. 38A) is replaced with "special figure 2" (special symbol 2) Since the same process as the special figure 1 changing process shift setting process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A5201b to A5207b in the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process correspond to steps A5201a to A5207a in the special figure 1 changing process shift setting process, respectively.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during fluctuation of Toku-zu 1.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5301). The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special figure 1 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared as a production command (A5302), and production command setting processing is executed (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) (A5306). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation count update processing, it can be determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is high. When the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (the result of A5306 is “Y”), as the stop symbol display time (stop display time) of the special figure 1, the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 is displayed. The corresponding display time is set (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a deviating symbol of the special figure 1, 2000 msec if the big hit symbol of the special symbol 1, and 136 msec if the small hit symbol of the special symbol 1. is there.

When the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5306 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the display time at the high-probability final variation as the display time of the special figure 1. (A5308). For example, the display time when the high-probability final change is 7000 msec.

After steps A5307 and A5308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A5309). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 1 stop symbol It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special display 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A5309 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 2 (the special display 2 variable display game also. It is determined whether or not it is being executed (A5310). Toku-zu 2 is not changing (result of A5310 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5320. When the Toku-zu 2 is also changing (result of A5310 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the below-mentioned Toku-zu 2 displaying process is being executed (A5311).

When the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5311 is “Y”), the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A5313. When the special figure 2 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5311 is “N”), the symbol determination frequency output frequency is updated by +1 (A5312). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of Toku-zu 1 (display time of Toku-zu + 4 msec) is set as the display time of Toku-zu 2 (A5313), and is displayed in the Toku-zu 2 game processing timer area Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game process (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3303), so that it is added. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. In addition, if the stop display of the special figure 2 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the falling pattern command of the decorative special drawing 2 as a production command (A5315), and executes production command setting processing (A5316). Then, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5317), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5318). After that, the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 2 in-process is executed (A5319).

By the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, the result of deviation of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 1 variable display game. The execution of the special figure 2 displaying process (end of the special figure 2 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is in execution (during change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 variable display game Is forced to end the fluctuation (forced end) due to the deviation result.

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) is up (A3204). Since the result is executed "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended (forced end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 1 command from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A5321). Special figure 1 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is "Y"), the special pattern 1 information that was saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) is special figure 1 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5321 is “N”), the game control device 100 selects the upper limit of the number of rounds from the aforementioned special figure 1 upper limit number of rounds information area Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5322).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the aforementioned special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5323). Then, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1 for setting the special figure 1 displaying process is executed (A5325), and the special figure 1 changing process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during change of the special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game results in a hit, the special figure 2 variable display game is disengaged. It constitutes a forced termination means to forcefully terminate the result.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5401). The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special drawing 2 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5403). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) (A5406). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation count update processing, it can be determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is high. If the special figure 2 variation display game to start is not a high-probability final variation (result of A5406 is “N”), the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 corresponds to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 The display time to be set is set (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a deviating symbol of the special figure 2, 600 msec if the big hit symbol of the special symbol 2, and 600 msec if the small hit symbol of the special symbol 2. is there. In addition, the display time of the deviating symbol, the big hit symbol, and the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is a high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5406 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the display time at the time of high-probability final fluctuation as the display time of special figure 2. (A5408). For example, the display time when the high-probability final change is 7000 msec.

After the steps A5407 and A5408, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a failure (A5409). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the information (stop symbol number at the time of off) saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of order (the result of A5410 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 1 (also executing the special figure 1 variable display game). Is determined (A5410). Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A5410 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5420. If the Toku-zu 1 is also changing (result of A5410 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the below-mentioned Toku-zu 1 displaying process is being executed (A5411).

When the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5411 is “Y”), the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A5413. When the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5411 is “N”), the symbol decision count output count is updated by +1 (A5412). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2+4 msec) is set (A5413), and displayed in the game processing timer area of the special figure 1. Save the time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3203), so that it is added. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of special figure 1 can be made the same. In addition, if the stop display of the special figure 1 has already started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the falling pattern command of the decorative special drawing 1 as a production command (A5415), and executes production command setting processing (A5416). Then, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5417), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5418). After that, the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 2 for setting the special figure 1 in-process is executed (A5419).

By the processing of steps A5413 to A5419, the result of deviation of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of processing during display of special map 1 (end of special display 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game has a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variable display game Is forced to end the fluctuation (end of execution) as a result of the deviation.

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 2 game processing timer repeats 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3304 and A3305). Is executed for "Y"), the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended in variation (end of execution) when the special result 2 variable display game in which the hit result stops.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 2 command from the decoration special drawing 2 command area, and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5421). Special figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5421 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) is special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5421 is “N”), the game control device 100 selects the upper limit of the number of rounds from the special figure 2 upper limit number of rounds information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5422).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5423). After that, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424). Next, the special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 1 for setting the special figure 2 during display process is executed (A5425), and the special figure 2 changing process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is running the special figure 1 variable display game (during change of the special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is disengaged. It constitutes a forced termination means that is forced to terminate as a result.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (A5325) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1.

The game control device 100 first sets "2" as a process number in order to shift to the process of displaying special figure 1 (A5501a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5502a). The signal related to the end of fluctuation of FIG. 1 (off data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503a).

Next, the game control device 100, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51, is the special figure 1 change control flag. The data is saved in the area (A5504a), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display transition process setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (A5425) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first sets "2" as a process number in order to shift to the process of displaying the special figure 2 (A5501b), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5502b). The signal related to the end of fluctuation of FIG. 2 (off data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503b).

Next, the game control device 100, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag. The data is saved in the area (A5504b), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (A5419) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 42A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 2. In the special figure 1 during-display process shift setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended by hitting the special figure 2 variable display game.

The game control device 100 first sets "2" as a process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 displaying process (A5601a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5602a). The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (A5604a). ).

Next, the game control device 100 shifts to the stop symbol pattern area, saves the stop symbol pattern (A5605a), clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (A5606a), and the special symbol 1 special winning opening opening information area. Is cleared (A5607a). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Subsequently, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (A5610a), and the deviation stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of deviation) is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5611a). By the above-described processing, the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 becomes a variable stop (variation end) with a stop symbol that is out of order.

[Special figure 2 display transition processing setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (A5319) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2. In the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended by hitting the special figure 1 variable display game.

The game control device 100 first sets “2” as a process number in order to shift to the special figure 2 displaying process (A5601b), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5602b). The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603b). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A5604b). ).

Next, the game control device 100 shifts to the stop symbol pattern area, saves the stop symbol pattern (A5605b), clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A5606b), and the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area. Is cleared (A5607b). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Subsequently, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (A5610b), and the deviation stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of deviation) is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5611b). By the above-described processing, the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 becomes a variable stop (variation end) with a stop symbol that is out of order.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 43A and FIG. 43B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of special figure 1. 43A shows the first half of the processing during the display of the special figure 1, and FIG. 43B shows the second half of the processing during the display of the special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag 1 (which indicates small hit information or deviance information) from the small hit flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the small hit flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 (which indicates big hit information or deviance information) is loaded from the big hit flag 1 area (A5703), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (A5704). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5705).

When the result of the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the Toku-zu 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5706). ). For example, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 1 signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5708).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a round number upper limit value table (A5709), and obtains the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table. It is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (A5710). The upper limit number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5712), and executes an effect command setting process (A5713). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Then, a fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5714), and production command setting processing is executed (A5715).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5716). The signals here are, for example, two big hit signals and three big hit signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, jackpot 2 signal is turned on in jackpots other than 2R, turned on in 2R jackpot in high probability, turned off in 2R jackpot in low probability, jackpot 3 signal is turned on in jackpots other than 2R, high probability It turns off at the 2R jackpot in the middle and turns on at the 2R jackpot in the low probability.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5717), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5718). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening that opens the upper special winning opening based on the special winning opening opening information (A5719).

When the game control device 100 is a jackpot for opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A5719 is "Y"), the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A5720), and the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period of the RWM. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area (A5721), and "3" is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5724). If it is not a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A5719 is “N”), the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A5722), and the fraud monitoring period flag area of the lower special winning opening of the RWM is outside the fraud monitoring period The flag is saved (A5723), and "3" is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5724).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5725), executes the fanfare/inter-interval process shift setting process (A5726), and ends the special figure 1 displaying process. ..

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5705 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 1. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit) (A5727). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5727 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game executed this time is a high-probability final change (A5728). When the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (result of A5728 is “Y”), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as a production command (A5729), and production command setting processing is executed. Yes (A5730).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power outage recovery of the RWM (A5731), and clears the left hitting instruction notification flag (A5732). The transmission command area upon power failure recovery saves the command output to the performance control device 300 upon power recovery. After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5734). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, this winning symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, if the current special map 1 variation display game is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5728 is “N”), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A5729 to A5732, and the winning symbol from the winning symbol command area. A command is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5734).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5735), and executes an effect command setting process (A5736). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (A5737). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A5737 is “N”), the signal regarding the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5738), and the right-handed state is confirmed. In order to turn off the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) to be notified, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area of the RWM (A5739). If it is in a high probability state (the result of A5737 is “Y”), the signal related to the right-handing instruction (on data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5740), and the right-handing is performed. In order to turn on the second game state display portion 56 (lamps D8 to D10) that informs that, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5741).

After steps A5739 and A5741, the gaming control device 100 clears the lower special winning opening fraud prize number area (A5742), saves the fraud monitoring outside flag in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A5743), Toku-zu 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing is executed (A5744), and Toku-zu 1 displaying processing ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit) (the result of A5727 is “N”), that is, the special figure 1 variable display game. If the result is no, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5745). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5754 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5753.

When it is a high-probability final variation (result of A5745 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as a production command (A5746), and executes production command setting processing (A5747). .. Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5748), and the left-hand instruction command notification flag is cleared (A5749). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5750). When the special display 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (result of A5750 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5753.

If the special control 2 variable display game is not in the small hit state (the result of A5750 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A5751). Then, in order to turn off the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that the player is right-handed, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5752). , Clearing the change of special map 1 in the special map status area (information subtraction) (A5753). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 1 normal process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5754), and the special figure 1 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 1 normal process shift setting process 1, "0" is set as a process number in order to shift to the special process 1 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 44A and FIG. 44B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special figure 2 displaying process. FIG. 44A shows the first half of the processing during display of special figure 2, and FIG. 44B shows the second half of the processing during display of special figure 2.

The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating small hit information or deviance information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801) and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 (which indicates big hit information or deviance information) is loaded from the big hit flag 2 area (A5803), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the on-data of the condition device operating signal, the on-data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the on-data of the special symbol 2 per signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A5807), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5808).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a round number upper limit value table (A5809), and obtains the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table. It is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A5810). The upper limit number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Then, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5811).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5812), and executes an effect command setting process (A5813). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Then, a fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5814), and production command setting processing is executed (A5815).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5816). The signals here are, for example, two big hit signals and three big hit signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, jackpot 2 signal is turned on in jackpots other than 2R, turned on in 2R jackpot in high probability, turned off in 2R jackpot in low probability, jackpot 3 signal is turned on in jackpots other than 2R, high probability It turns off at the 2R jackpot in the middle and turns on at the 2R jackpot in the low probability.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5817), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5818). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening that opens the upper special winning opening based on the large winning opening opening information (A5819).

If the game control device 100 is a jackpot for opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A5819 is “Y”), the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A5820), and the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period of RWM. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area (A5821), and "3" is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5824). If it is not a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A5819 is "N"), the lower special winning opening fraud number area is cleared (A5822), and the fraud monitoring period flag area of the RWM lower special winning opening is outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5823), and "3" is set as the process number to shift to the fanfare/interval process (A5824).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5825), executes fanfare/inter-interval process shift setting process (A5826), and ends the special figure 2 displaying process. ..

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) (A5827). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5827 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5828). When the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (result of A5828 is “Y”), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as a production command (A5829), and production command setting processing is executed. Yes (A5830).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the RWM power failure recovery transmission command area (A5831) and clears the left-hand instruction command notification flag (A5832). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5834). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this winning symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, if the current special figure 2 variation display game is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5828 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the processing of steps A5829 to A5832, and issues a command from the winning symbol command area. A winning symbol is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5834).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5835), and executes an effect command setting process (A5836). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (A5837). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A5837 is “N”), the signal related to the left-handing instruction (OFF data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838), and the right-handing is performed. In order to turn off the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) to be notified, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5839). In the case of high probability state (result of A5837 is “Y”), the signal related to right-handing instruction (ON data of firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5840), and right-handing is performed. In order to turn on the second gaming state display portion 56 (lamps D8 to D10) that informs that, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5841).

After the steps A5839 and A5841, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a small hit for opening the upper special winning opening (A5842). When it is a small hit to open the upper special winning opening (the result of A5842 is "Y"), the upper special winning portion fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A5843), and the fraud monitoring period is set in the upper special winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area. The outside flag is saved (A5844), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing is executed (A5847), and the special figure 2 displaying processing is ended. If it is not a small hit to open the upper special winning opening (the result of A5842 is “N”), that is, if it is a small hit to open the lower special winning opening, the lower special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A5845). , The fraud monitoring period flag outside the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (A5846), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing is executed (A5847), and the special figure 2 displaying processing is ended. ..

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5827 is “N”), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game. If the result is no, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5848). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5848 is “N”), the process moves to step A5856.

When the probability change is high (the result of A5848 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5849), and executes effect command setting processing (A5850). .. Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5851), and the left-hand instruction command notification flag is cleared (A5852). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5853). If the special display 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (result of A5853 is “Y”), the process moves to step A5856.

When the special hitting 1 variable display game is not in the small hit state (the result of A5853 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A5854). Then, in order to turn off the second game state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) for informing that it is right-handed, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5855). , Clearing the change of special map 2 in the special map status area (information subtraction) (A5856). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 2 normal process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5857), and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 2 normal process shift setting process 1, "0" is set as the process number to shift to the special figure 2 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 displaying process and the special figure 2 displaying process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of a big hit (on data of one big hit signal) in the external information output data area (A5901), and saves a signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area. (A5902), the round number area for managing the number of rounds in the RWM is cleared (A5903).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5904), and saves the low special figure probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5905). By setting the special figure low probability & no time saving flag, the probability of hitting becomes low and there is no time saving (no longer saving time). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery (A5906), and the high probability variation number is kept in the RWM. The probability variation frequency area is cleared (A5907).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the big hit information in the special figure status area (A5908), and clears the high-probability final fluctuation flag area holding the high-probability final fluctuation flag in the RWM (A5909). Then, the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8) which saves a signal (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) relating to the right-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A5910) and notifies that it is right-handing. In order to turn on -D10), the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5911).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A5912), and creates a special figure 2 abnormal number area in which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is held in the RWM. 0 clear (A5913), special figure 1 holding the number of fluctuations in RWM Special figure 1 number of fluctuations area is cleared to 0 (A5914), and special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification timer value is held in RWM The fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (A5915), and the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 Small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process shift setting process (A5744) in the special figure 1 displaying process will be described. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special feature 1 small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets "7" as a process number in order to shift to the small hit fanfare process (A6001a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6002a). Subsequently, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6003a), and the signal related to the start of the small hit (on data of one big hit) is saved in the external information output data area. (A6004a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (on-data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the special figure 1 small hit in the test signal output data area (A6005a), and during the small hit in the special drawing status area. The information is saved (A6006a). Further, the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6007a), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 Small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare middle process shift setting process (A5847) in the special figure 2 displaying process will be described. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit small fanfare processing transition setting processing.

Special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing, special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing (Figure 46A) “special figure 1” (special design 1) “special figure 2” (special design 2) Since the same processing as the special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare middle processing shift setting processing respectively correspond to steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
Next, details of the fanfare/inter-interval processing (A3211, A3314) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A6101). Since the number of rounds is set to 0 in the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing (A5903), it is 0 before the big hit operation this time. Thereafter, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6102), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6104), and saves it in the big hit medium processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6105). Here, 0 is set as the initial value in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed during one round, and in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once in one round, the initial value is suddenly set to the upper limit. Set the value (=21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing are repeated, the initial value may be not 0 but a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Further, it is possible to have a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated for one of the upper and lower major winning openings, and the pattern is opened only once for the other, or both the upper and lower major winning openings are opened and closed. It may be a pattern in which the above is repeated or a pattern in which it is opened once.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds (A6106). Then, "4" is set as the process number in order to shift to the process during the opening of the special winning opening (A6107), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (A6108). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6108 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6109), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing. Save in the timer area (A6110). Special Figure 1 If the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6108 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6111), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. The data is saved in the area (A6112).

Next, the game control device 100, based on the special winning opening opening information, determines whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper special winning opening (A6113). When it is a big hit to open the special winning opening (the result of A6113 is "Y"), the special winning opening opening processing transition setting processing 1 is executed (A6114), and the fanfare/interval processing is ended. If it is not a big hit to open the upper special winning opening (the result of A6113 is "N"), that is, if it is a big hit to open the lower special winning opening, the big winning opening opening processing transition setting processing 2 is executed (A6115). , End fanfare/interval processing. In the present embodiment, there are two types, a big hit that opens only the upper special winning opening and a big hit that opens only the lower special winning opening. However, a big hit that opens both the upper special winning opening and the lower large winning opening is provided. A configuration is also possible.

[Prize winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 (A6114) in the fanfare/interval process will be described. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1.

The game control device 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the upper special winning opening (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 1) in the test signal output data area (A6201a), and in the special winning opening solenoid output data area of the RWM. The special winning opening on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved (A6202a), the special winning opening count number is cleared (A6203a), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Processing setting process 2 during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 (A6115) in the fanfare/interval process will be described. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2.

The game control device 100 saves the signal related to the opening of the lower prize opening (ON data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6201b), and in the RWM big winning opening solenoid output data area. The lower special winning opening ON data for turning on the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved (A6202b), the special winning opening count number is cleared (A6203b), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (A3212, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process.

First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a big hit medium processing control pointer (A6301), and determines whether or not the value of the loaded big hit medium processing control pointer is equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (for example, 21). (A6302). When the value of the big hit medium processing control pointer is less than the big hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is "N"), the big hit medium processing control pointer is updated by +1 (A6303), and the processing according to the big hit medium processing control pointer is performed. The operation shift setting process is executed (A6304), and the special winning opening opening process is ended.

When the value of the mid-hit processing control pointer is greater than or equal to the big hit operation end value (result of A6302 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6305). If the number of rounds (A6101) updated by +1 in the fanfare/interval processing is the final round number (for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R), it can be determined to be the final round.

When it is not the final round (result of A6305 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares an interval command as an effect command (A6306) and executes an effect command setting process (A6308). When it is the final round (result of A6305 is "Y"), the ending command is prepared as a production command (A6307), and production command setting processing is executed (A6308).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A6309), and sets "5" as the processing number in order to shift to the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A6310). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6311). If the special display 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6311 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special display 1 game processing number area (A6312), and the remaining ball processing time is set to the special display 1 game processing timer. Save to area (A6313). If the special display 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6311 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6314), and the remaining ball processing time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save to (A6315).

After the steps A6313 and A6315, the game control device 100 turns off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, so the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6316). The process of opening the special winning opening is ended.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit operation transition setting process (A6304) in the process of opening the special winning opening will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit operation shift setting process.

The game control device 100 first performs a branch using the mid-hit processing control pointer (A6401). It is also possible to use the value before the +1 update in step A6303 for the processing control pointer during the big hit, instead of the current value. When the value of the big hit mid-game processing control pointer is an even number, a wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the big hit mid-game processing control pointer is set (A6402), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6403).

When the value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is odd, the gaming control device 100 sets the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the processing control pointer during the big hit (A6404). For example, the big winning opening opening time is 200 msec when the big hit medium processing control pointer is 1 to 19 (big hit medium processing control pointer=1 to 19), and the big hit medium processing control pointer is 21 (big hit medium processing control pointer=21). In the case of, it is 25000 msec. The special winning opening opening time of 200 msec is used in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed for a short time during one round. Subsequently, the upper special winning opening ON data for turning on the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6405). As a result, the special winning opening can be repeatedly opened and closed for a short time. If the lower special winning opening repeats opening and closing for a short period of time, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area, or the lower large winning opening ON data and the upper large winning opening ON A configuration that saves both data is also possible.

After the steps A6403 and A6405, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A6406). When it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6406 is "Y"), the set time (wait time or special winning opening opening time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6407). When it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6406 is "N"), that is, when it is the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6408). ).

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3213, A3316) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6501). If it is not the final round (the result of A6501 is "N"), the test signal output is the signal related to the end of opening the special winning opening (off data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal). The data is saved in the data area (A6502), the special winning opening opening information and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6503), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A6504). ). As a result, the fanfare/interval processing, the special winning opening opening processing, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing are repeated until the final round. The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round until the special winning opening remaining ball processing time and the interval time elapse.

Game control device 100, when it is the final round (the result of A6501 is "Y"), executes the big hit end process transition setting process for making a transition to the big hit end process (A6505), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Is set (A6506), and "6" is set as the process number (A6507). Thereby, it is possible to shift to the big hit ending process. The length of the ending period is the sum of the ending time and the special winning opening remaining ball processing time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 or the like during this ending period.

After steps A6504 and A6507, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A6508). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A6508 is "Y"), the set process number ("3" or "6") is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6509), and set. The saved time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6510), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

If the game control device 100 is not the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6508 is “N”), that is, if it is the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the process number (“3” or “6”). ) Is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6511), the set time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6512), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is finished. ..

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the big hit ending process transition setting process (A6505) in the special winning opening remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process shift setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of opening the special winning opening (off data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area ( (A6601), the special winning opening count number area that holds the special winning opening count number is cleared in the RWM (A6602), and the round number area is cleared (A6603). Then, the round number upper limit value area is cleared (A6604), the round number upper limit value information area is cleared (A6605), the special winning opening opening information area is cleared (A6606), and the big hit mid-process control pointer area is cleared. (A6607).

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 1 (A6701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6702). Then, save the signal related to the end of the big hit (one big hit off data and three big hit off data) in the external information output data area (A6703), and the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (output from the big hit. Continuously output the two jackpot signals) to the external information output data area (A6704).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6705). The signal regarding the end of the big hit is, for example, the off data of the condition device operating signal, the off data of the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, and the off data of the special symbol per signal. Then, the signal related to the start of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal. .. After that, the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the high probability in the game state display number area (A6708), saves the number in the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A6709), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A6710). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6711), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6712). Clear the area (A6713)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit state (A6714). In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the big hit ends, it becomes a high probability state and a time saving state. Then, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6715). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (A6716).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 jackpot end process. This special figure 2 game wait time value delays the determination of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) at the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 6). Is set to. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice the interrupt period (that is, 2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1310 of FIG. 6) that is performed immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (A1310 of FIG. 6) in which the special figure 1 big hit ending process is executed. In (A1311) of FIG. 6, since the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game has started (started within the timer interrupt process this time), the special figure 2 variable display game is It will start first and may be a problem. Note that the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end process, and therefore remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed in the next timer interrupt processing (special figure 1 normal processing during the special figure 1 game processing).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to a time (8 msec) twice as long as the interrupt cycle, but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process) This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interruption processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec) and becomes 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game. Of the fluctuation start (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, it is determined whether the variation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game has started (special figure 1 game processing and special figure If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing simultaneously. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a deviating symbol (forced termination or originally unchanged).

In addition, if there is no particular problem in the game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game after the jackpot state ends, the process of step A6717 is omitted and FIG. 2 The game wait time value may not be set.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process.

The game control device 100 first sets “0” as a process number to return to the normal process of special figure 2 (A6801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A6802). Then, save the signal related to the end of the big hit (1 big hit off data and 3 big hit off data) in the external information output data area (A6803), and the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (output from the big hit. Continuously output two jackpot signals) to the external information output data area (A6804).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6805). The signal regarding the end of the big hit is, for example, the OFF data of the condition device operating signal, the OFF data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the OFF data of the special symbol 2 signal. Then, a signal related to the start of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal. .. After that, the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the high probability number in the game state display number area (A6808), saves the right hitting number in the game state display number 2 area (A6809), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A6810). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6811), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6812). Clear the area (A6813)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high-probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high-probability state (probability change state) after the big hit state ends (A6814). In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the big hit ends, it becomes a high probability state and a time saving state. Then, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6815). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (A6816).

In addition, in the special figure 2 big hit ending process, it is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value. The special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, so they remain at 0. In the next timer interrupt processing, the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game starts. If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied after the determination (in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is performed, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing at the same time. This is because it can be done.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting fanfare processing (A3215, A3318) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit fanfare process.

First, the game control device 100 performs a branch according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening due to the small hit (special drawing 1 small hit, special drawing 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) (A6901). The opening pattern of the special winning opening by the small hit corresponds to the small hit stop symbol number (A4312a, A4312b) and the small hit symbol (A4313a, A4313b stop symbol pattern).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 prepares a small hitting opening command of the lower special winning opening opening as an effect command (A6902) and executes an effect command setting process ( A6903). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6904), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6905), and the small winning opening time 1 (for example, 48 msec) is set as the opening time of the special winning opening. Saved in the special processing 1 game processing timer area (A6906). Then, the signal (start data of the special electric auditors 2 working signal) related to the start of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (A6907), and the lower special winning opening on-data is set in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6908).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 1, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening during opening command of the lower special winning opening as an effect command (A6909), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6910). Next, “8” is set as the processing number (A6911), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6912), and the small hit opening time 2 (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the special winning opening. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6913). Then, the signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (ON data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6914), and the lower special winning opening on-data is set in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6915).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command of the upper special winning opening opening as an effect command (A6916), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6917). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6918), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6919), and the small winning opening time 3 (for example, 1200 msec) is set as the opening time of the special winning opening. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6920). Then, the signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (ON data of the special electric auditors product 1 in-operation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6921), and the upper special winning opening on-data is set in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6922).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is special figure 2 small hit 3, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command of the upper special winning opening opening as an effect command (A6923) and executes an effect command setting process. (A6924). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6925), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6926), and the small hit opening time 4 (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the special winning opening. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6927). Subsequently, the signal (start data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal) relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (A6928), and the upper special winning opening on-data is stored in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6929).

After the steps A6908, A6915, A6922, and A6929, the game control device 100 clears the special winning hole count number area (A6930), and finishes the small hit fanfare medium processing.

As described above, for each type of the small hit stop design number or the small hit opening pattern corresponding to the small hit design (special drawing 1 small hit, special drawing 2 small hit 1, 2, 3), large open by small hit The winning opening (either the upper winning opening or the lower winning opening), the opening time of the winning opening (small opening time), etc. are determined. In the present embodiment, the control pointer is not set and only the small hit opening pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once is set. However, as in the case of the big hit, the control pointer is set to open and close the special winning opening. There may be a repeating small hit opening pattern. Further, by setting "8" as the process number, it is possible to shift to the process during the small hit after the end of the process during the small hit fanfare.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (A3216, A3319) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the small hit.

The game control device 100 first prepares a small hit end screen command as an effect command (A7001) and executes an effect command setting process (A7002). As a result, the effect control device 300 that has received the small hit end screen command can cause the display device 41 to display the small hit end screen.

Next, the game control device 100 performs a branch according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening due to the small hit (special drawing 1 small hit, special drawing 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) (A7003).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number (A7004) and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7005). , Small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7006). Then, in order to turn off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A7007), and the small hit mid-end process is ended.

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 1, the game control device 100 sets "9" as the process number (A7008) and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7009). ), the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7010). Then, in order to turn off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A7011), and the small hitting medium process is ended.

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2 or the special figure 2 small hit 3 the game control device 100 sets "9" as the process number (A7012), and in the special figure 2 game process number area. The processing number is saved (A7013), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7014). Then, in order to turn off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A7015), and the small hit mid-end processing is ended.

By setting "9" as the process number, it is possible to shift to the small hit remaining ball process after the end of the small hit medium process.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A3217, A3320) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A7101). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A7101 is "Y"), "10" is set as the process number (A7102), and this process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area ( (A7103), the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7104).

If the game control device 100 is not a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A7101 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, it sets "10" as the process number. Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7106), and the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7107).

After the steps A7104 and A7107, the game control device 100 outputs a signal regarding the end of the small hitting operation (off data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) as test signal output data. The area is saved (A7108), the special winning opening count area is cleared (A7109), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended. By setting "10" as the process number, it is possible to shift to the small hit completion process after the small hit remaining ball process is completed.

[Special drawing 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 1 (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7202). Then, save the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7203), and save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Yes (A7204). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7206).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is in the high probability state (A7207). When it is in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “Y”), the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). When it is not in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “N”), the signal related to left-handed instruction (off data of launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7208), and in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

Here, for the same reason as step A6717 of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (FIG. 53), 8 msec (2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt period, is set to The special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the small hit state in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change (special figure 1 game processing and special figure If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing simultaneously.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit ending process.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7302). Then, save the signal about the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7303), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area Then (A7304), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7305). Further, the off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7307).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is in the high probability state (A7308). If it is in the high probability state (result of A7308 is “Y”), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A7308 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7309), and the game state display number 2 area is displayed. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7310), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

For the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit ending process (FIG. 54), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit ending process.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control processing (A3220, A3323) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol variation control process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

In the game control device 100, the special figure variation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is a changing flag (a flag indicating changing). It is checked whether or not (A7401). If it is changing, the changing flag is saved in the change control flag area (A5205a, A5205b).

Then, as a result of the check, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation control flag is the changing flag (A7402), and if the special figure fluctuation control flag is the changing flag (A7402) The result is "Y"), and the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is acquired (A7403). The address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined in the fluctuation control table (A3219, A3322). Further, of the special diagrams 1 and 2, the blinking control timer according to the special diagram to be controlled (for example, special diagram 1) is updated by -1 (A7404), and the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up. It is determined whether or not (A7405).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (result of A7405 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the target varying symbol number area (A7408). If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (result of A7405 is “Y”), the blink control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the control target blink control timer area (A7406). Further, of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol number in change relating to the special figure of the control target (for example, special figure 1) is updated by +1 and saved in the variable symbol number area of the target (A7407), the target The display data corresponding to the value of the changing symbol number area is acquired (A7408). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process ends.

In this way, the variable display game in which the non-lighted symbol (changing symbol number=0) and the illuminated symbol (changing symbol number=1) are repeated is the special symbol display device (special symbol display device 51 or The special figure 2 display 52) is executed. The initial value of the changing symbol number is set to 0 indicating a non-illuminated symbol, for example (A5207a, A5207b).

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not the changing flag (result of A7402 is “N”), the game control device 100 displays the symbol display table () corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1). (For stop) is acquired (A7409). The address of the symbol display table (for stop) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol area (stop symbol number) is acquired (A7410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol fluctuation control process is ended.

In this way, among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure display (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52) to be controlled becomes the stop symbol number. The stop design of the corresponding special map will be displayed. In the stop symbol area, a stop symbol number is saved corresponding to a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (A5324, A5424).

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the information based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmitting process (A1305), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (A1314). A process of creating information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A7801). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (result of A7801 is “N”), it is determined whether a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A7802). When the main frame opening error is not occurring (result of A7802 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7803), and the OFF data of the security signal is output as the external information output data. Save to area (A7804).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A7801 is “Y”) or the main body frame opening error is occurring (result of A7802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 The ON data of the frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7806).

If the security signal control timer is not 0 after the steps A7804 and A7806, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A7807), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up or not). The determination is made (A7808). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like (A1026 of the main process). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A7808 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A7809). If the security signal control timer is not 0 (result of A7808 is "N"), ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (result of A7809 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A7811). When frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (result of A7809 is “Y”), ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and then the process proceeds to step A7811. When a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A7811 is “Y”), ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7812), and the process proceeds to step A7813.

When the switch abnormality error is not occurring (the result of A7811 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet malfunction is occurring (A7813). It should be noted that it can be determined that the magnet malfunction is occurring when the magnet malfunction flag is saved in the magnet malfunction flag area. When the magnet malfunction is not occurring (the result of A7813 is “N”), it is further determined whether the board radio malfunction is occurring (A7814). It should be noted that it can be determined that the board radio wave irregularity is occurring when the board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area.

When the board radio wave infraction is not occurring (result of A7814 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not a special winning opening fraud is occurring (A7815). If the fraudulent winning flag relating to the special winning opening (upper special winning opening or lower special winning opening) is saved in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the special winning opening fraud is occurring. When the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A7815 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal variation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game) is occurring ( A7816). In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area, it can be determined that the special figure 2 abnormal variation is occurring. Special figure 2 When abnormal fluctuation is not occurring (the result of A7816 is "N"), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7817).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (result of A7813 is “Y”), when the board radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A7814 is “Y”), the special winning opening fraud is If it is occurring (result of A7815 is “Y”), or if the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (result of A7816 is “Y”), the ON data of the security signal is stored in the external information output data area. The data is saved (A7818), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7819). Depending on the setting of on-data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After the steps A7817 and A7819, the game control device 100 starts the opening 1 signal editing process (A7820), starts 2 signals editing process (A7821), main prize ball signal editing process (A7822), symbol determination number signal editing process ( A7823) is executed, and the external information editing process ends. The starting port 1 signal editing process is a process when the starting port 1 switch 36a is input, and the starting port 2 signal editing process is a process when the starting port 2 switch 37a is input.

[Design decision number signal editing process]
Next, the details of the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (A7023) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the symbol determination frequency signal editing process. The symbol determination frequency signal editing process is a process of outputting a symbol determination frequency signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to an external device.

The game control device 100 first updates -1 if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (A8101). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (A8102).

When the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A8102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is 0. (A8103).

And, the game control device 100, when the symbol decision number signal output number is not 0 (the result of A8103 is "N"), the symbol decision number signal output number is updated by -1 (A8104), and the symbol decision number signal output. The control timer saves the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value (A8105). The symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 256 msec) in the ON state (for example, high level) and the OFF state (for example, 300 msec) of the symbol determination frequency signal. (For example, 556 msec).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8107), and ends the symbol determination frequency signal editing process. If the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is 0 (the result of A8103 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A8108), and the symbol fixed number signal editing process is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (result of A8102 is "N"), whether the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section or not. Is determined (A8106). It is to be noted that the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer being in the output ON section means that the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 msec) or more.

When the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section (the result of A8106 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs ON data for turning the symbol determination frequency signal on to the external information of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A8107). If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (result of A8106 is “N”), OFF data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is external information output data of RWM. The image is saved in the area (A8108), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is terminated.

[Modification of control of game control device]
Below, the modification of the control (processing) of a game control apparatus is demonstrated. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-described control (processing) of the game control device.

In the above control processing (FIG. 39, FIG. 40, etc.), while one special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game or special figure 2 variation display game) is changing, the other special figure variation display game When the special figure 2 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result (a big hit or a small hit), one of the special figure variable display games is forced to end the variation (forced end) due to the miss result. However, as in the following modified example, in this case, regarding this one special figure variation display game, measurement of the variation time by the timer is interrupted and the game result is derived (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number). It is also possible to postpone the game and restart the interrupted one special figure variation display game after the end of the hitting operation for the other special figure variation display game (after the end of the big hit state or the small hit state).

Even during the interruption of the special figure variation display game, the variation itself of the special symbol (identification information) is apparently continued on the display device 41 and the special figure variation display section (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52). (Note that it is also possible to temporarily stop the fluctuation of the special symbol during the interruption). When the fluctuation apparently continues, according to another concept, it can be said that the fluctuation time is extended for one special figure by the time of the hit operation (time in the big hit state or the small hit state) with respect to the other special figure. ..

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process (A1310) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process according to the modification. FIG. 63 is a diagram in which the process of step S8200 is added to FIG. The processing from steps A3201 to A3220 in FIG. 63 has the same contents as in FIG.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8200). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8200 is "N"), the processes of steps A3201 to A3220 are executed.

On the other hand, when the Toku-zu 1 game interruption flag is set (result of S8200 is “Y”), the game control device 100 changes the Toku-zu 1 display 51 without performing the processes of steps A3201 to A3218. After preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling (A3219), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 1 display device 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is ended. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol on the special figure 1 display 51 is apparently continued.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process (A1311) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process according to the modification. FIG. 64 is the one in which the process of step S8300 is added to FIG. The processing from steps A3301 to A3323 in FIG. 64 has the same contents as in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8300). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is "N"), the processes of steps A3301 to A3323 are executed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (result of S8300 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A3301 to A3321 and changes the special figure 2 indicator 52. After preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling (A3322), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is ended. In this way, when the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) that measures the variable time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself apparently continues on the special figure 2 display 52.

[Special figure 1 Processing during fluctuation (modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 mid-changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process according to the modification. In FIG. 65, the processes of steps A5311 to A5319 of FIG. 39 are deleted, and the processes of steps S8411 to S8416 are added. The processing of steps A5301 to A5310 and steps A5320 to A5325 of FIG. 65 has the same content as that of FIG. 39, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not off (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A5309) If the result is “N” and the result of A5310 is “Y”), the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted by the processing of steps S8411 to S8416. When the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result fluctuates and stops, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not off and the special figure 2 is changing, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (S8411). .. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (result of S8411 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (special figure 2 game processing timer=4 msec). A determination is made (S8412). That is, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as the special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game. To do.

When the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (the result of S8412 is "Y"), the game control device 100 immediately follows the special figure 2 game processing (the current timer interrupt). The special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec) to 0 at (starting in the process) and becomes 0, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be ended with a loss result. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to interrupt the special figure 2 variable display game, and the process moves to step A5324.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of order (the result of S8411 is "N"), or if the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec, the game control device 100 (the result of S8412 is "N"). )), a special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being suspended is set (S8413). The special figure 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8300 described above. Then, a decoration special figure 2 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8414), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8415). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interruption command can set the effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (decreases by 4 msec) (S8416). This is because the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413) and the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game processing immediately after the current special figure 1 game processing. Instead, the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec). As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the special figure 2 game processing timer is excessively increased by 4 msec when the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (see FIG. 85).

After step S8416, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A5320 to A5325, as in FIG. Note that, in the special figure 1 changing process according to the modification, unlike FIG. 39, the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process according to the modification. 66 is obtained by deleting the processes of steps A5411 to A5419 of FIG. 40 and adding the processes of steps S8511 to S8513. The processing of steps A5401 to A5410 and steps A5420 to A5425 of FIG. 66 is the same as that of FIG.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and when the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A5409) If the result is “N” and the result of A5410 is “Y”), the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted by the processing of steps S8511 to S8513. When the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not off and the special figure 1 is changing, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. It is set (S8511). The special figure 1 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8200 described above. Then, a decoration special figure 1 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8512), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8513). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 interruption command can set the effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game.

After step S8513, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A5420 to A5325 as in FIG. Note that, in the special figure 2 changing process according to the modified example, unlike the case of FIG. 40, the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process according to the modification. 67 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8617 to S8621 to FIG. The processing from steps A6701 to A6716 in FIG. 67 has the same contents as in FIG.

After step A6716, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (S8617). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8617 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in RWM is cleared (S8620), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of S8617 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (S8618), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8619). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Then, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8620), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621). , The special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the timing (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is " N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

Note that the process of step S8621 is the same as the process of step A6717 of FIG. 53, and the special figure 2 game wait time value is the variation start of the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends in the special figure 1 variable display game. (Restart) is set in order to delay it at the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 6), and is 8 msec which is twice the interrupt cycle. As a result, with the timer interrupt processing after the jackpot state ends in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variable display game will be started (restarted) within the current timer interrupt process before the special figure 1 variable display game. After the end of the big hit state, if there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started (restarted) earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, the process of step A8621 is omitted. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the special figure 2 game wait time value.

Further, the change start determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is determined at the time of the next timer interruption process based on the special figure 2 game wait time value, but the decoration special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the effect control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100, and thus the time for one interruption (4 msec) can be absorbed.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing (modified example)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process according to the modification. 68 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8717 to S8720 to FIG. 54. The processing from steps A6801 to A6816 in FIG. 68 has the same contents as in FIG.

After step A6816, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (S8717). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8717 is “N”), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (S8720), 2 The big hit ending process ends.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of S8717 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (S8718), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8719). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for resuming decoration special figure 1 can execute the process for resuming the variable display game for decoration special figure 1. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is ended.

By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the change time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is " N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

In addition, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set in the special figure 2 big hit ending process. This is because both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be started (restarted) within the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 small hitting end processing according to the modified example. 69A is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 58 has the same contents as in FIG. 58, description thereof will be omitted.

If the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “Y”), or after step A7209, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (S8810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8810 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of S8810 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. A command is prepared (S8811), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8812). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. Then, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. To do. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the small hit state in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game. The process of step S8814 is similar to step A7210 of FIG. Further, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the special figure 2 variable display game which has been interrupted is restarted.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 small hitting end processing according to the modification. 69B is obtained by adding the processing of steps S8911 to S8814 to FIG. 59. Since the processing from steps A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 59 has the same contents as in FIG. 59, the description thereof will be omitted.

If the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A7308 is “Y”), or after step A7310, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (S8911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8911 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of S8911 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (S8912), and executes effect command setting processing. Yes (S8913). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. Then, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted can be restarted.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below. For convenience of explanation, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described as corresponding to the above-described modified example of the control of the game control device 100 (a configuration for restarting the interrupted special figure variation display game). In the case of a basic configuration (a configuration that is not a modified example) in which the special figure variation display game is forcibly terminated, the processing relating to the interruption and restart of the special figure variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B1003), and interrupts are permitted (B1004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

Then, production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B1002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Rendering button input processing is executed (B1009). Subsequently, a hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as the change of the brightness of the LED and the liquid crystal and the volume by the player is executed (B1011). Then, the random number update process for updating the random number such as the effect random number is executed (B1011), the received command received from the game control device 100 is analyzed, and the corresponding received command check process is executed (B1012). The details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display edit processing of updating various data according to the contents displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1014).

Then, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B1015). When it is not the frame switching timing (result of B1015 is “N”), the processing of B1015 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. When it is the frame switching timing (result of B1015 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. The screen drawing is instructed (B1016). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 second, and the interval may be further increased.

The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1017).

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including the LED (B1018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling the performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1019). In the movable body control process, for example, the solenoid is driven to execute the accessory motion effect.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B1008, if the above-mentioned processing of B1019 is completed. After that, the processing from B1008 to B1019 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Next, the details of the received command check processing (B1012) in the main processing (FIG. 70) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 71. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After the value is subtracted by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer into the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

And production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read in the order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107) and analyzes the content. The processing is executed (B1108), and details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 72. Also, the address of the analysis command area is updated (B1109), after which the processing of step B1101 is performed. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the loaded commands is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are repeated. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 71) described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. It Therefore, the upper part and the lower part of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 36). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

When the MODE part does not represent a variable system command (result of B1205 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the hit system command (B1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to a performance during a big hit or a small hit, and is, for example, a hit pattern command, a round command, a small hit opening command, etc. .. When the MODE part indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent a hit command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). There are decorative special figure 1 commands (A4316a in FIG. 29A) and decorative special figure 2 commands (A4316b in FIG. 29B) corresponding to the stopped symbol patterns as the symbol-based commands. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the symbol type command (result of B1209 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the one-shot type command (B1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a one-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (B1213). .. The prefetch symbol system command includes the prefetch stop symbol command (A3111 in FIG. 17). When the MODE part represents the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not the range of the look-ahead variable system command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation system command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 17). When the MODE part indicates the prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single-shot command processing]
Details of the single-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) described above will be described next with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the single-shot command processing executed by the production control device 300. FIG. 73B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the single-shot command processing executed by production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). When the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and single-shot command processing is executed. finish.

When the MODE part does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command. (B1305). If the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (result of B1305 is “Y”), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (if there is a special figure game interruption flag that was backed up in the RWM), the command for restoring power failure is The 1-variation display game is being suspended or the special figure 2 variable display game is being suspended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "N"), then it determines whether or not the MODE part represents the customer waiting demo command. B1307). If the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (result of B1307 is "Y"), customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single shot system command process is ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, and thus the processes of steps B1311, B1312 may be omitted. However, when the special figure 2 variable display game is configured not to start immediately even if the special figure 2 starting memory is generated (for example, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit) In the case), the special figure start information 2 switch process (FIG. 16) also performs the special figure hold information determination process (prefetch process, pre-determination process), and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command from the game control device 100. May be transmitted.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). Note that, as the error/unauthorized command, for example, a fraud command (A2108), a fraud cancellation command (A2116), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (A2414), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (A2418), a state off There are a command (A2504) and a status on command (A2507). If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), error/illegal setting processing for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (B1316), Terminates single-shot command processing.

When the MODE part does not represent an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), the production control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents a production mode switching command. The determination is made (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command for the production mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not the command for the symbol stop is represented. (B1319). As commands for stopping the symbols, there are a decoration special figure 1 stop command and a decoration special figure 2 stop command. Then, when the MODE part indicates the command for stopping the symbol (the result of B1319 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the command is normal (B1320). If it is not a normal command (result of B1320 is “N”), the single-shot system command processing is ended.

When the command is a normal command (result of B1320 is “Y”), effect control device 300 performs stop setting for stopping the corresponding special drawing (decoration special drawing 1 or decoration special drawing 2) (B1321). Then, if all the special symbols (identification information) in the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 have stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the single shot system command processing is ended. In addition, the game state flag is a flag that can indicate other states such as changing, big hit, and small hit.

When the MODE part does not represent the command for stopping the symbol (the result of B1319 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents the command for fluctuation interruption. (B1323). The commands for suspending variation are the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 in FIG. 66) and the decoration special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 in FIG. 65). If the MODE part indicates a command for fluctuation interruption (result of B1323 is "Y"), fluctuation interruption setting processing is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command for fluctuation interruption (the result of B1323 is “N”), next determines whether the MODE part represents a command for fluctuation restart. (B1325). The commands for resuming fluctuations are the above-mentioned decoration special figure 1 restart command (S8718 in FIG. 68) and the decoration special figure 2 restart command (S8618 in FIG. 67). If the MODE part indicates a command for interruption of fluctuation (result of B1325 is “Y”), fluctuation restart setting processing is executed (B1326), and single-shot system command processing is ended.

Even if the command for suspending fluctuation is not received, if a hit command related to the effect (big hit or small hit) of the decorative special figure change display game of one of special figures 1 and 2 is received, The effect control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the other decorative special figure variation display game is being executed, and perform the variation interruption setting process and the subsequent variation restart setting process.

In the single-shot system command processing, effect control device 300 may receive a command other than the above-described commands and perform corresponding processing.

[Variation interruption setting process]
Details of the variable interruption setting process (B1324) in the above-described single-shot system command process (FIG. 73) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the received variation interruption command is a normal command (B1401). If the command is not a normal command (result of B1401 is “N”), the variable interruption setting process ends. If the command is normal (result of B1401 is “Y”), it is determined whether the command is received at power-on (B1402). If the command is received when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is "Y"), the decoration special map variable display game is executed corresponding to the received command (decoration special drawing 1 interruption command or decoration special drawing 2 interruption command). The special flag (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating that the process is being interrupted is set (B1403).

If the command is not received when the power is turned on (result of B1402 is “N”), the effect control device 300 is changing the target design (decoration special drawing 1 or decoration special drawing 2) to be interrupted from now on. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the variable display game of the symbols to be interrupted is being executed (B1404). When the target symbol is not changing (the result of B1404 is “N”), the change interruption setting process is ended. When the target symbol is changing (result of B1404 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the received command for changing interruption is a decoration special figure 1 interruption command (B1405).

When the received variation interruption command is the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (result of B1405 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets the interruption variation display of decoration special figure 1 (B1406). For example, on the display screen (display section) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is displayed large in the center, a variable display for interruption is set so that it is moved to a corner and displayed in a reduced size. Alternatively, the variable display for interruption, which is displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual, may be set. Subsequently, the interruption flag of the decoration special map 1 indicating that the decoration special drawing 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1408).

When it is in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1409). When the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is “N”), the display of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is suggested on the display device 41 or the like. The display setting of the effect for interruption is executed (B1410), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is ended.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the low probability state (result of B1408 is “N”), that is, in the high probability state, the effect of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, the display setting of the effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the variable interrupt setting process ends. When the result of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1409 is “Y”), the effect of the big hit of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Toku-zu 1 The display setting of the effect for interruption of the variable display game is not performed, and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the received variation interruption command is not the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (result of B1405 is “N”), that is, if it is the decoration special figure 2 interruption command, the effect control device 300, the decoration special figure 2 The variable display for interruption is set (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special map 2 is largely enlarged (main display, normal display) at the center, it is moved to the corner and displayed smallly. The variable display for interruption may be set, or the variable display for interruption displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual may be set. Subsequently, the interruption flag of the decoration special map 2 indicating that the decoration special drawing 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1412). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1413).

When the production probability control device 300 is not in the low probability state (result of B1413 is “N”), that is, in the high probability state, it is determined whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (B1414). ). When the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is "N"), the display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is suggested on the display device 41 or the like. Display setting of the effect for interruption is executed (B1415), and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

When the effect control device 300 is in the low probability state (the result of B1413 is “Y”), the effect of the decorative special map 1 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. The variable interruption setting process is ended without performing the display setting of the effect for interruption of the display game. When the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1414 is “Y”), the effect of the big hit of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Toku-zu 2 The display setting of the effect for interruption of the variable display game is not performed, and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

[Variation restart setting processing]
Details of the fluctuation restart setting process (B1326) in the above-described single-shot system command process (FIG. 73) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change restart setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, production control device 300 determines whether or not the received command for restarting fluctuation is a normal command (B1501). If it is not a normal command (result of B1501 is “N”), the variable restart setting process is ended. If it is a normal command (result of B1501 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the received command for variable restart is a decorative special figure 1 restart command (B1502).

When the received command for resuming variation is the decoration special figure 1 restart command (result of B1502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 changes the decoration special figure 1 based on the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the display game is suspended (B1503). If the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of B1503 is “N”), the variable restart setting process ends.

When the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (result of B1503 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1505). The power failure recovery display is a display that indicates that the power failure has been recovered and that processing is being performed after the power failure is recovered. When the power outage restoration display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is "Y"), the change restart of the decorative special map 1 for recovery according to the probability state (restart of the decorative special map 1 variable display game for recovery) is set. (B1506). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (result of B1505 is "N"), restart (not for recovery) of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game according to the probability state is set (B1507).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the received command for restarting the variation is not the decoration special figure 1 restart command (result of B1502 is “N”), that is, when it is the decoration special figure 2 restart command, the decoration special figure 2 It is determined whether the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted based on the interruption flag of (B1508). If the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of B1508 is “N”), the variable restart setting process is ended.

When the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (result of B1508 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 2 (B1509). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1510). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is “Y”), the change restart of the decorative special map 2 for recovery according to the probability state (restart of the decorative special map 2 variable display game for recovery) is set. (B1511). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is “N”), the restart (not for recovery) of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game according to the probability state is set (B1512).

Regarding the processing of steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, the probability state may change between when the interruption of the decorative special figure variation display game is started and when it is restarted. Therefore, when resuming, the display mode of the symbol differs depending on whether or not there is a probability state that the target symbol is preferentially displayed. For example, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during a low probability, it will be interrupted in a state where the reduced symbol of the special figure 1 continues to fluctuate in the corner of the display device 41, but if the probability is low at the time of resumption, the special figure 1 Is restarted in a state in which is displayed with a large priority in the center of the display device 41. If there is a high probability/shortening time when restarting, restart with the reduced design (reduced display).

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the details of the prefetch symbol type command processing (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decoration special figure hold number command as the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, the process of step B1603 is basically not executed. However, when the special figure 2 variable display game is configured not to start immediately even if the special figure 2 starting memory is generated (for example, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit) In the case), the game control device 100 may transmit a decoration special figure 2 hold number command, and the process of step B1603 may be executed.

Rendering control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a prefetching variable system command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetching variable system command (B1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the prefetching symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the details of the prefetching variable system command process (B1215) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetching variable system command (B1701). When the prefetch variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the prefetch variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable system command processing is ended. If the prefetch variable system command is waiting to be received (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable system command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holdings of the design (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest pending information (B1703), and the pre-reading variation system command An intra-sub-readahead variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the intra-sub-readahead change command MODE part and ACT part) are both other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. When both the converted MODE part and ACT part are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command composed of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the hold number. The pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) is saved (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is started when the variable display game is started. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation-type command is converted into the sub-prefetching variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half variation corresponding to the sub prefetch change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system, if the production control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half variation) of the look-ahead variation system command, the number becomes large and the check becomes difficult. .. For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach+1 stop deviation. Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is “N”), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold newly generated is a failure (B1711). .. When the latest hold is a hit (the result of B1711 is “N”), the effect control device 300 calculates the total time until the latest hold special figure variation display game ends changing (B1712). The total time also includes the stop symbol display time.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decorative special figure variation display game will be interrupted when the variation of the latest pending special figure variation display game ends (B1713). If the latest hold is the special figure 1 hold, the other decorative special figure variable display game is the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, for example, when the other decorative special figure variable display game is not running after the calculated total time, or when the other decorative special figure variable display game is out of sync, the other decorative special figure variable display game is displayed. It is determined not to suspend.

When the other decorative special figure variation display game is to be interrupted (result of B1713 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a prefetch effect execution plan for suspending suspension (B1714). Note that the suspension hold is a suspension corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game to be suspended. In addition, being scheduled to be executed includes that the prefetching effect is being executed. When there is a plan to execute the pre-reading effect for the suspension hold (the result of B1714 is “Y”), it is determined whether the pre-reading effect for the suspension hold is a notice of pending change (B1715).

When the pre-reading effect of suspension pending is not a pending change notice (result of B1715 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the production replacement for the pre-reading effect of suspension pending is in time (B1716). When it is impossible to forcibly end the prefetching effect already, it is determined that the effect replacement will not be in time (the replacement is not performed). When the effect replacement is in time (the result of B1716 is “Y”), the converted command is saved in the prefetching variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and the pending number so as to replace the effect (B1717).

Production control device 300, if the latest hold is out (result of B1711 is “Y”), if it is not to interrupt the other decorative special figure variation display game (result of B1713 is “N”), suspend hold If there is no plan to execute the pre-reading effect for the above (the result of B1714 is “N”), the pre-reading effect of suspension and suspension is a notice of pending change (the result of B1715 is “Y”), and if the replacement of production is not in time (in B1716). If the result is “N”), the effect is not replaced, and the process directly proceeds to step B1718.

Next, the production control device 300 loads the prefetch target suspension information (latest suspension information) from the prefetching variable command area (B1718), and executes the prefetch lottery process regarding the latest suspension prefetching effect (B1719). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead notice effect is generated (B1720). When the pre-reading notice production of the latest hold occurs (the result of B1720 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice production that occurs is a production that starts immediately (B1721). For example, the pre-reading notice effect is a notice of a pending change, and the effect to be started immediately is, for example, a notice of a pending change when the pending occurs. When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1722). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest pending look-ahead notice effect (the result of B1720 is “N”), or if the generated look-ahead notice effect is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is “N”). ), as it is. The read-ahead variable command processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the special figure holding information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process) is not performed in the special figure starting port 2 switch processing, the special figure 2 starting memory (special figure 2 holding) is performed. On the other hand, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) and the prefetch variable system command (prefetch variation pattern command) are not transmitted from the game control device 100. Therefore, the processes of steps B1715 to B1717 are basically not executed. However, when the special figure 2 variable display game is configured not to start immediately even if the special figure 2 starting memory is generated (for example, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit) In the case), the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command for the special figure 2 starting memory (special figure 2 hold) are transmitted from the game control device 100, and the processing of steps B1711 to B1717 may be executed. Good.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the details of the symbol type command processing (B1210) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol system command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is the above-mentioned outlier symbol, 2R probability variation symbol, 4R probability variation symbol, 8R probability variation symbol, 16R probability variation symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) will be described below with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation system command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special map type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as a case where a variable system command which is out of order is received but a symbol system command of a probability variation symbol is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable type command processing is ended.

When the variation type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (fluctuation command) (B1904) and changes the effect. The variable effect setting process to be set is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is being changed in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of prefetching effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 79) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special drawing type, and the effect mode is set (B2002), and the variation system command ( The MODE part of the (variable command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special map type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

If the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the variation is with reach, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type. The notice distribution group address table is set (B2004), and the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are acquired (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Then, set the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type (B2007), and set the address of the latter notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variable system command. It is acquired (B2008), and a notice lottery that appears during the latter half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the lottery for the notice (B2011). After that, the stop design of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the blemishes in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (result of B2013 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2015. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is related to the symbol that is the main display (B2014). The variation this time is a decorative special figure variation display game executed by the variation system command this time. For example, when the variable display of the decoration special map 1 is largely enlarged (normal display) in the center of the display device 41, the special display 1 is the main display.

When the present variation is related to the symbol which is the main display (the result of B2014 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the variation effect (B2015) and the display setting of the notice effect. (B2016). Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is set (B2017), and the voice number that determines the effect mode by the speaker and the decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2018).

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B2019), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that are varied on the display device 41. When there is (4th symbol), the display setting of the 4th symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (B2020). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED other than the display device 41.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is “Y”), and when the change this time is not related to the symbol that is the main display (the result of B2014 is “ N”), that is, when the fluctuation this time is a fluctuation during power failure recovery display and relates to a design reduced in the corner of the display device 41, a fluctuation effect or a notice effect so as not to perform a flashy effect. The display setting of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure classification is performed (B2019) without performing the setting (B2015 to B2018).

[Modification of control of production control device]
A modified example of the control (processing) of the effect control device will be described below. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-described control (processing) of the effect control device.

[Variation interruption setting process (modified example)]
A modified example of the fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation interruption setting process according to the modification. 81 is obtained by deleting the processes of steps B1402, B1403, B1410 and B1415 from FIG. 74 and adding the processes of steps T2115, T2116, T2117 and T2118. In FIG. 81, the same steps as those in FIG. 74 are designated by the same step numbers (reference numerals), and description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “Y”) and the result of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is "N"), and the freezing display setting of the changing effect of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is set (T2115). The fluctuating effect includes the aforementioned fluctuating effect and advance notice effect. Freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also set the display of a series of movies until freeze. Subsequently, the display setting of the superimposed image (movie display of characters and the like) for the freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2116).

When the effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interruption command is not in the low-probability state (the result of B1413 is "N") and the result of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (B1414: The result is "N"), and the freezing display setting of the effect during change of the decoration special figure 2 change display game is set (T2117). The fluctuating effect includes the aforementioned fluctuating effect and advance notice effect. Freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also set the display of a series of movies until freeze. Subsequently, display setting of the superimposed image for freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2118).

In the above, the freeze effect is performed after receiving the decorative special figure suspending command, but the effect is performed based on the prefetching command before the decorative special figure suspending command is received, and the decorative special figure suspending command is received. At the same time, it is possible to raise the interest by creating a production that freezes.

[Variation restart setting processing (modified example)]
A modified example of the variation restart setting process (B1326) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation restart setting process according to the modification. FIG. 82 includes the processes of steps T2210-T2215 and T2216-T2221 in place of the processes of steps B1505-B1507 and B1510-B1512 of FIG. 82, the same steps as those in FIG. 75 are designated by the same step numbers (reference numerals), and description thereof will be omitted.

After step B1504, effect control device 300 sets the restart of the variation of decorative special drawing 1 (restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) according to the probability state (T2210). Then, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2211). When the power failure restoration display is being displayed (the result of T2211 is “Y”), the change restart of the decoration special drawing 1 (restart of the decoration special drawing 1 change display game) in the reduced design (reduced display) is set (T2212). ).

When the effect control device 300 receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command, when the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of T2211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or more than a predetermined time ( T2213). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2213 is “Y”), the rewinding effect display setting and the reproduction speed are set (T2214), and the fluctuation resumption setting process ends. In the rewinding effect, the effect before the interruption of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is performed again on the display device 41 at a high reproduction speed. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is “N”), the time for the rewinding effect is insufficient, so that the restart effect display and the accessory driving are set using the electric auditors (T2215). ), the fluctuation restart setting process ends.

In addition, after step B1509, the decoration special figure 2 restart command effect control device 300 sets the change restart of the decoration special figure 2 (restart of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game) according to the probability state (T2216). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2217). When the power failure restoration display is being displayed (the result of T2217 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart of the decoration special drawing 2 (restart of the decoration special drawing 2 variable display game) in the reduced design (reduced display) is set (T2218). ).

When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (result of T2217 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (T2219). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2219 is “Y”), the rewinding effect display setting and the reproduction speed are set (T2220), and the fluctuation resumption setting process ends. In the rewinding effect, the effect before the interruption of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is performed again on the display device 41 at a high reproduction speed. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2219 is “N”), the time for the rewind effect is insufficient, so that the restart effect display using the electric auditors and the accessory driving are set (T2221). ), and ends the fluctuation restart setting process.

[Operation and effect of the first embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 83 to 90, the operation and effect of the present embodiment (including modified examples) will be described. 83 to 90, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are abbreviated as the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display device based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is provided. When is a predetermined result mode (hit result mode including small hit result mode and big hit result mode), it is possible to generate a predetermined game state (small hit state, big hit state) capable of giving a game value to the player.

The special figure 1 game process as the first control means executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first variable display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening 36). Take control. The special figure 2 game processing as the second control means executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning in the second start winning opening 37). Take control.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can both be in a running state (running state). Then, when one of the special display 1 variable display games and the special figure 2 variable display games has a hit result mode (predetermined result mode), the other variable display game is ended and the other change is displayed. The display game may be set as a result mode (FIGS. 39, 40, 42A and 42B). Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become the hit result mode. If both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are stopped in the hit result mode, the gaming machine 10 hits one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Since it can only be executed, a problem occurs.

As in the time chart of FIG. 83, a process (FIG. 39, FIG. 40, FIG. 41A, FIG. 41B) of stopping the variable display of one variable display game in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 83) is executed. At this time, it is possible to execute processing for forcibly ending the variable display of the other variable display game in the result mode (FIG. 39, FIG. 40, FIG. 42A, FIG. 42B). This allows the other variable display game to continue as long as possible. In addition, a new variable display game of the other is not started until the predetermined game state (small hit state, large hit state) that occurs when one of the variable display games is in the hit result mode is finished (see special FIG. 1 in FIG. 21). Normal processing, special processing 2 of Figure 22 (normal processing). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become the hit result mode.

Further, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 84, when one of the variable display games has the hit result mode (the small hit result mode in FIG. 84), the execution time (fluctuation time) of the other variable display game is measured (measured). The other variable display game may be interrupted by stopping the update of the special figure game processing timer (clocking means)) (variations of FIGS. 63, 64, 65, 66). When the predetermined game state that occurs when one of the variable display games becomes the hit result mode ends, the other variable display game can be restarted by restarting the update of the special figure game processing timer (time measuring means) (FIG. 63). 64, and the modified examples of FIGS. 67 to 69B). As indicated by the hatched portion in FIG. 84, the other variable display game after resuming can be executed by the remaining variable time after interruption (remaining time of the timer).

Further, since the other variable display game can be restarted even if interrupted, unlike the case where the other variable display game is forcibly stopped in the result mode, when the other variable display game has a hit result, the other variable display game is restarted. It is possible to generate a predetermined game state (small hit state, large hit state) by the display game, and it is possible to prevent a problem that damages the profit of the player. For example, when one of the variable display games derives the small hit result mode while the other variable display game that is the big hit result mode is being executed, the other variable display game is interrupted, but the small hit game by the one variable display game is performed. When the state ends, the other variable display game can be restarted to derive the jackpot result mode.

Furthermore, since the process of suspending the variable display of the other variable display game is executed when the process of stopping the variable display of the one variable display game in a hit result mode is executed, the variable display game of the other variable display game is executed as much as possible. Can continue. During the suspension of the other variable display game, if the identification information of the other variable display game is variably displayed, the apparent variation can be continued, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The game control program (game control program) stored in the storage means (ROM 111b) of the game control means (game control device 100) includes main processing and timer interrupt processing for the main processing. The present embodiment can be applied to other interrupt processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. In the same timer interrupt processing, the special figure 1 game processing (first control means, first control processing) has priority over the special figure 2 game processing (second control means, second control processing), and the special figure 1 game After the processing, the special figure 2 game processing is executed.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 85(a), when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the hit result mode and the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 game process (FIG. 64) is executed. Since the game processing timer cannot be updated, the special figure 2 game processing timer (time measuring means) for measuring the execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game is updated only for the time of one interruption cycle (4 msec) (step A8416 in FIG. 65). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the special figure 2 variable display game after the restart of the fluctuation is additionally executed for the time corresponding to one interruption cycle. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 85(b), when this timer is not updated, the interrupt period is 1 for the entire variable time (t1 before interruption+t2 after interruption) when updating. The total fluctuation time increases by the time (4 msec) of the batch. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result mode and the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, it is not necessary to update the timer for measuring the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 86(a), the predetermined game state (small hitting game state in FIG. 86) that occurs when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the hitting result mode (small hitting result mode in FIG. 86) is When it ends, the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not delayed by a delay timer (delay means) for a predetermined time (wait time) (FIG. 68, FIG. 69B). On the other hand, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 86(b), when the predetermined game state that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode ends, the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with a delay timer ( The delay means delays a predetermined time (wait time of 8 msec) (S8621 of FIG. 67, S8814 of FIG. 69A). By setting the delay timer, it is possible to restart the special figure 2 variable display game at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game by the timer interrupt processing after the hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game ends.

Further, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 87(a), the special figure 2 variable display game does not depend on the variable display state (stop state, apparent variable state during interruption, etc.) of the special figure 2 variable display game. A delay timer (wait time of 8 msec) may be set. As a result, in the timer interrupt process for performing the ending process of the predetermined game state (the hit ending process of FIGS. 53, 58, 67, and 69A) that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode, The special figure 2 variable display game by the special figure 2 game processing cannot be started (FIGS. 19 and 64 ). Then, if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the timer interrupt process after the ending process of the predetermined game state, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are executed. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be started at the same time. In addition, at the timing of the ending process of the predetermined game state, if there is already a special figure 1 start memory and a special figure 2 start memory (in the case of the configuration for storing the special figure 2 start memory), or the first start at this timing. When there is a winning in the winning opening 36 and a winning in the second starting winning opening 37, the first starting condition and the second starting condition are satisfied.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 87(b), when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the hit result mode, the timer interrupt process after the ending process of the predetermined game state is performed without setting the delay timer. If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously started by the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. it can.

Furthermore, when one of the variable display games of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped in a hit result mode, the remaining of the other variable display game with respect to the other variable display game. A process corresponding to the variable time (value of the special figure game processing timer) may be performed (S8412 in FIG. 65). In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game end at the same timing, and at the same time the winning result is derived.

For example, the other variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as the one variable display game that stops in the hit result mode, based on the remaining variation time of the other variable display game. It is determined whether or not (S8412 in FIG. 65). Specifically, in the special figure 2 game processing executed after the special figure 1 game processing for stopping the special figure 1 variable display game in a hit result mode, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game may be zero. Whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec in the special figure 1 changing process is determined).

In the case where the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variable display game stops in the hit result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game If the result mode is a hit result mode, in the special figure 1 game process (special figure 1 changing process in FIG. 65), the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted to suspend the variable display. If the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the off result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game is set as the off result mode within the special figure 2 game process (particularly during the special figure 2 changing process of FIG. 66). Perform processing to stop.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 88(a), the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted in a situation where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may bring out the hit results at substantially the same time. By doing so, it is possible to perform an interruption process to postpone the stop of the variable display. Then, the derivation of the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game is prioritized, and the hit state (hit operation) by the special figure 1 variable display game starts first. After the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game is derived (the apparent variable display stopped during the interruption), and the hit state by the special figure 2 variable display game (win) (Operation) is started, so that there is no disadvantage to the player. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started even if there is special figure 1 starting memory (special figure 1 hold) during the hit state (hit operation) by the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3501 in FIG. 21). Is "N").

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 88(b), the special figure 2 variable display game ends at the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as the special figure 1 variable display game for deriving the hit result (small hit here). In a case where there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game is in the outlier result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped as it is in the outlier result mode. No problem occurs even if the result mode of this deviation is derived as it is. When the process of stopping the special display 2 variable display game in the off result mode is performed, the stop display time of the off result mode (the time from the stop until the determination of the off result) is calculated as the hit result of the special display 1 variable display game. By setting the same as the stop display time of the mode (the time from the stop to the determination of the hit result (start of fanfare)), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, as shown in the time charts of FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the game control device 100 (game control means) causes a power failure if a power failure occurs during the interruption of the other variable display game and the power failure is restored (power on). After the recovery (at the time of recovery or after the recovery), before execution control of one of the variable display games is started, an interruption command (interruption command) indicating that the other variable display game is being interrupted is produced. It may be transmitted to 300 (production control means) (A1022 in FIG. 5B, B1305 in FIG. 73A). The effect control device 300 can recognize that the other variable display game is being interrupted and the one variable display game is in a hit state (hit operation) by the interruption command, and with regard to the decoration special figure of one of the variable display games. Corresponding processing such as processing for displaying the winning symbol on the display device 41 (see the restoration screen display 1 in FIGS. 89 and 90) can be performed.

When the power failure is restored, the performance control device 300 may display a recovery screen (power failure recovery display) on the display device 41 to suggest the recovery of the power failure. When the decorative special figure variation display game displayed in the main display (first display) is interrupted, a command related to the control of the interrupted decorative special figure variation display game after the power is restored. The recovery screen may be terminated when (command) is received. The commands related to the control of the decorative special figure variation display game include, for example, a variation command regarding the start of the decorative special figure variation display game (see FIG. 89) and a decoration special figure stop command regarding the stop of the decorative special figure variation display game (see FIG. 90)). When the command (command) related to the control of the decorative special figure variable display game on the side (reduced display side, second display side) displayed in a size different from the main display is received, the recovery screen is not terminated.

With the decorative special figure stop command, when returning to the normal screen after the end of the recovery screen, the disengagement stop pattern may be the default random pattern. In the case of a hit stop design, a default hit design according to the game value (number of rounds, etc.) of the hit state may be used. The background of the normal screen may correspond to the probability state or the like.

There is a possibility that the command related to the control of the decorative special character variable display game on the side not on the main display (the reduced display side) may be received before the command related to the control of the decorative special character variable display game of the main display is received. However, if the recovery screen is terminated at that time, a problem may occur. For example, even if the probability is low, the player will be in a probable state (time saving state) if the recovery screen is ended and the normal screen is displayed at the start of the decorative special figure variation display game that is being reduced. There is a risk of misidentification. Therefore, even if a command relating to a new variation start of the reduced decoration special figure variation display game (here, the decoration special figure 2) is received as in the recovery screen display 2 of FIGS. 89 and 90, the variation is simply changed. Only start display, do not exit recovery screen.

The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) stores the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game as start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition. It is possible. The start memory display control means (for example, the segment LED edit processing or the main processing in FIG. 70) displays the number of start memories stored in the start memory means in a predetermined start memory display area of the display device or the display. This allows the player to be notified. Then, the effect control device 300 normally displays the number of starting memories and the variable display of the variable display game restarted after the interruption in the recovery screen after the recovery on the display device 41 (when the recovery screen is not displayed). It may be displayed in a state of higher transparency. In addition, when the apparent variable display is continued even during the interruption, the variable display continued during the interruption may be displayed in a high transparency state. In the recovery screen, the fluctuation display displayed on the main display may be shake fluctuation.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the same embodiment (configuration) as the first embodiment can be applied.

[Game board]
FIG. 91 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, the game board 30 includes a flat board-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40, which forms a window serving as a display area of the variable display game, is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind the window formed in the center case 40.

In the center case 40, an inlet 40c to a warp passage 40a for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which a game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. And are provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start winning port 36 and the normal variation winning device 33, the game ball rolled on the stage part 40b is the first starting winning port 36 or the regular variation. It is easy to win the winning device 33. A lamp display device 80 is provided on the lower right side of the game area 32. The lamp display device 80 displays the number of starting memories of each special figure variation display game and the like.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 92) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 92) provided in the general winning openings 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a first starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided, and an ordinary variable winning device 33 is provided immediately below the winning opening. Is provided. The normal variation winning device 33 is provided with a movable member 33c that is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. When the movable member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 33.

In the second embodiment, unlike the prior art, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored by winning a prize in the prize hole (normal electric prize hole) of the ordinary variable prize device 33. It is configured to be stored. Therefore, the ordinary electric prize opening (first starting winning area) is included in the category of the first starting winning opening 36, and the ordinary electric prize switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 92). That is, the ordinary electric winning opening and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to a plurality of first starting winning areas, and at least a part of the first starting winning areas is in a closed state and an open state. It is configured as a normal variation winning device 33 having a movable member 33c that can be converted into.

In the second embodiment, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls to convert the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the universal figure variation display game. It is connected to the universal solenoid 33b (conversion control means) for performing (see FIG. 92). The movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 is an attacker-type normal electric accessory that opens the normal electric winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side by the normal electric solenoid 33b. As the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33, by sliding the movable member 33c in the front-back direction by the universal electric solenoid 33b to advance and retreat, a so-called bello type in which a game ball can flow into the regular electric prize opening Ordinary electric accessory may be provided. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the game control apparatus 100 pivotally opens the movable member 33c via the universal electric solenoid 33b, and the gaming ball normally varies. It is changed to an open state where it can flow into 33.

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure variation display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or A time saving state (universal support (electric power support) state) is generated by lengthening the occurrence time of the easy winning state rather than the easy winning state that occurs in the gaming state.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40, a second starting winning opening (second starting winning area) 37 for providing a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Further, a first special variable winning device (lower big winning port) 38 is provided to the left of the second starting winning port 37, and a second special variable winning device (upper) is provided above the second starting winning port 37. A special winning opening) 39 is provided.

In the second embodiment, the first special variation winning device (lower prize winning opening) 38 has a sliding to open/close door (opening/closing member) 38c, which is a tongue-shaped member, moving forwards and backwards to play the large winning opening. The ball is converted into a state in which it can flow in (see, for example, JP-A-2017-77362). The first special variation winning device 38 converts the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game balls into the special winning opening, thereby allowing the player to play. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The second special variation winning device (upper special winning opening) 39 is provided with a movable member 39c that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, thereby converting the game ball into a state in which it easily flows. When the movable member 39c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot be won in the special variation winning device 39. The second special variation winning device 39 converts the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper special winning opening, thereby allowing the player to play. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In the second embodiment, the special game state is a small hit (first special game state) that can occur when the small hit mode (first special result) and a big hit mode (second special result). It includes a big hit (second special game state) that can be generated when it becomes.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the winning of the game ball to the special electric prize winning opening (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) It is possible to control the execution of the variable display game (first variable display game). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a first execution control means for performing such control.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening (second starting winning area) 37. It is possible to control. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a second execution control means for performing such control.

Further, as will be described later, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation in which the player is more advantageous than the normal game state after the end of the big hit (second special game state) (the probability of hit is high, and , It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed with the support of normal electric power. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a specific game state generation means for performing such control.

General winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, normal variation winning device 33, large winning opening of first special variation winning equipment 38, and large winning opening of second special variation winning equipment 39 When the game balls are won, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 92) discharges the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 33, there is provided an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.

At the upper right of the second special variation winning device 39, a ball guiding unit is provided. The ball guiding unit is a member that rolls the game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area 32 in the lateral direction and guides it to the second special variation winning device 39 or the like.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 that display information such as the current game state.

[Game control device]
FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the game control device 100 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration example of the control system of the game control device 100 according to the second embodiment will be described, but unless otherwise specified, the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, a gate switch 34a is provided for the game control device 100 of the first embodiment. The gate switch 34 is connected to the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121. The gate switch 34a detects winning of the universal figure starting gate 34. In addition, in the second embodiment, a universal electric solenoid 33b is provided for the game control device 100 of the first embodiment. The universal solenoid 33b is connected to the first driver 138a.

Then, as will be described later, when the universal figure random number value extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is a hit value, the game control device 100 drives the universal solenoid 33b to move the movable member 33c for a predetermined time. It is opened by rotating (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is changed to an open state in which it easily flows into the normal variation winning device 33.

Further, in the second embodiment, as described above, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning by the winning of the prize hole of the normal variable prize device 33 (Phoden prize hole). The memory is stored. Therefore, the ordinary electric prize opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (shift) of the game state by the above-mentioned game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the second embodiment. FIG. 93 is a summary of each game state, in which the control by the game control device 100 in each game state, the control by the effect control device 300, and the features in the game state are shown. In the second embodiment, the game state has a normal game state, a first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a third specific game state.

First, each gaming state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (hit probability of a special figure) to be a low probability, and the normal electric power support (electric power support) is absent. Further, in the normal game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode. Also, in the normal game state, left-handed shooting is recommended as the firing direction. Therefore, since the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, the main variation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variation display game.

In the first specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a high probability, and there is a universal electric power support (the number of times of support is 50 times). That is, in the first specific game state, the conversion control by the universal solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is controlled to be executed more than in the normal game state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state. ..

Moreover, in the first specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the probability variation mode. Further, in the first specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched rightward. By hitting the ball to the right, it becomes easy to win the prize in the universal figure starting gate 34, and the main starting area is the winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the prize at the Poden prize hole, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the second specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (hit probability of the special figure) to be a high probability and the normal electric power support is absent. That is, when the above-mentioned first specific game state shifts to the second specific game state, the conversion control by the universal electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is returned to the same control as the normal game state, and the special figure It can be said that the probability state of is set to the high probability state (FIG. 96).

In the second specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to small hit RUSH (rush). As will be described later, in the second specific game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to a short time, so the small hit RUSH is likely to continuously generate small hits in a short period of time. It can be said that a lot of prize balls are obtained. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the second specific game state is executed, a small hit (first special result) is derived as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). It is possible.

Also, in the second specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be shot in the rightward direction. Therefore, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 37, and the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game.

In the third specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (hit probability of the special figure) to be a low probability, and the normal electric power support is provided (the number of times of support is 50 times). Moreover, in the third specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time saving mode. Also, in the third specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched rightward. By hitting the ball to the right, it becomes easy to win the prize in the universal figure starting gate 34, and the main starting area is the winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the prize at the Poden prize hole, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

Next, the transition (shift) from each gaming state will be described. It is assumed that a big hit (second special game state) occurs in the normal game state. If the big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit is the normal big hit in the normal game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the third specific game state.

When a normal big hit occurs in the first specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the third specific game state. In addition, when the probability variation big hit occurs in the first specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts to the first specific game state again. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, when the jackpot does not occur and the universal electric power support ends, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state ("high support regulation in FIG. 93". The “number of times” ends. Note that “high support” means that the probability of hit is high and there is electric support).

That is, in the first specific game state, as a condition for transition to another game state, the occurrence of a big hit (second special game state) is used as a condition (first transition condition), and a predetermined number of normal electric power support In some cases, (execution of variable display game) may be a condition (second transition condition). By doing so, for example, the first specific game state can be generated after the occurrence of a big hit (second special game state) in the normal game state, but in the first specific game state, the aforementioned When the second transition condition is satisfied, the second specific game state can be generated.

In the second specific game state, if the big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the first specific game state. On the other hand, when the big hit is the normal big hit in the second specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the third specific game state. That is, in the second specific game state, as a condition for shifting to another game state, a big hit (second special game state) is generated.

When the probability variation big hit occurs in the third specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the first specific game state. When a normal big hit occurs in the third specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts to the third specific game state again. On the other hand, in the third specific game state, when the jackpot does not occur and the universal electric power support is finished, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the normal game state (“low support prescribed number of times” in FIG. 93). “Low end” means that the winning probability is low and there is electric support).

Since the gaming state shifts in this way, it is possible to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the probability variation big hit occurs in the normal gaming state. In the first specific game state, since the normal electric power support is executed and the hit probability is set to a high probability, a big hit can be easily generated. And the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific game state, in the second embodiment, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state. In the second specific game state, although the normal electric power support is not executed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed by winning the second start opening 37. Here, unlike the special figure 1 variable display game, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 variable display game is set to a high probability (in FIG. 96 described later, the small hit probability is set to an extremely high probability). Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is possible to execute the "small hit RUSH" mode in which a small hit (first special game status) is frequently generated until the next big hit occurs. Further, since it is possible to increase the number of payouts in a gaming state other than the big hit (second special gaming state), it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 having a novel gaming property.

Also, in the first specific game state, there is normal power support, and in the second specific game state, there is no normal power support as in the normal game state, so a small hit (first special game state) It is possible to execute the second variable display game in which a large number of characters are allocated at a good tempo.

In addition, the special figure variation display game is executed with a high probability of a big hit in the second specific game state, so that a big hit (second special game state) occurs at an appropriate timing and another game state occurs. The transition condition of is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an extreme increase in payout due to excessive continuation of the second specific game state.

Hereinafter, each process in the second embodiment will be described. The processing added in the second embodiment and the processing to be described again for easy understanding are denoted by “A*****”, followed by the number “A” and a number in the 10,000 range.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program) in the second embodiment. In FIG. 94, the process of step A11311 is added between step A1311 and step A1312 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A1301 to A1311 and the processing from steps A1312 to A1315 have the same contents as in FIG.

In step A11311, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A11311). The details of the normal figure game process will be described later with reference to FIG.

By doing so, in the second embodiment, the universal figure variation display game can be executed. Then, when the universal figure variation display game is in the winning mode, the special variation 1 variation display game is performed by opening the prize opening of the normal variation prize winning device 33 (the Poden prize opening) and winning the game ball at the Poden prize opening. Can start.

Especially, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, the universal electric power support is executed (see FIG. 93). In the first specific game state, the special electric figure 1 variable display game can be frequently started by the electric power support (electric power support), and since the winning probability is high, a big hit is likely to occur. be able to. Further, even in the third specific game state, it is possible to easily cause the special figure 1 variable display game to frequently occur due to the normal electric power support.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 95A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the Toku-zu 1 variation start process in the second embodiment. In FIG. 95A, the process of step A13718 is added after step A3717 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A3701 to A3716 has the same contents as in FIG.

Compared with the special figure 1 variation start processing in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, the contents of the high probability variation number update processing (A3717) are partially different, and a new time saving variation number update processing (A13718) is newly added. Has been done.

The high-probability variation number update process (A3717) is a process of managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a state where the winning probability is high. The time saving change count updating process (A13718) is a process of updating the time shortening change count, checking the end of universal communication support, and setting necessary information. Details of the high-probability variation number updating process (A3717) and the time saving variation number updating process (A13718) in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, respectively.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the high probability variation number update process (A3717) is executed in the special figure 1 variation start process, so that it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the time saving variation number update process (A13718) is executed in the special figure 1 variation start process, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with a low support prescribed number.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 95B is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 95B is obtained by adding the process of step A13809 after step A3808 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A3801 to A3808 has the same contents as in FIG.

The high-probability variation number update process (A3808) is a process of managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a state where the winning probability is high. The time-shortening change count updating process (A13809) is a process of updating the time-shortening change count, checking the end of universal communication support, and setting necessary information. The details of the high-probability variation number updating process (A3808) and the time saving variation number updating process (A13809) in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, respectively.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the high probability variation number update process (A3808) is executed in the special figure 2 variation start process, so that it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with the high support prescribed number.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the time saving variation number update processing (A13809) is executed in the special figure 2 variation start processing, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with a low support prescribed number.

FIG. 96 is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the outfall probability, and the probability variation probability in the second embodiment. These tables show the big hit probability (probability that the judgment result will be a big hit), the small hit probability (probability that the judgment result will be a small hit), and the deviation probability (the judgment result is a deviation if the big hit judgment processing and the small hit judgment processing described above are performed. Probability) and probability variation probability (probability variation inrush rate) are shown for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. 96(a) shows the probability in the low probability state, FIG. 96(b) shows the probability in the high probability state, and FIG. 96(c) shows the probability variation inrush rate.

Also in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability (probability of jackpot occurrence) is higher in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. The small hit probability (probability of small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. It is also possible to make the small hit probability high in the high probability state and low in the low probability state. For example, in the low probability state, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game may be set to “0”. Further, the outlier probability (probability of outlier) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a big hit mode (second special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game (first variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). The probability setting means is controllable into a low-probability state in which the probability of deriving is set to a low probability and a high-probability state in which a higher probability than the low-probability state is set.

Further, in the second embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display in the special figure 2 variable display game. It becomes higher than the game, and the outlier probability is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the off probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0). Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is possible to generate a small hit with an extremely high probability by winning the second start winning hole 37.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 described above, in the low probability state, the second half offset data for long time variation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4507), and the long time variation (long variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game is set. )become. However, in the high probability state, since the latter half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not set, the normal variable time variation in the special figure 2 variable display game (short variation compared to long variation) become. As a result, in the second specific game state of the high probability state, a small hit occurs more frequently in the special display 2 variable display game than in the low probability state, and a large number of prize balls are obtained by the small hit (small hit). RUSH).

In the second embodiment, after the jackpot state ends, the probability variation state or the normal state is established. As shown in FIG. 96(c), the 16R probability variation inrush rate is 2% in both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability variation inrush rate is 2% in the special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 Both floating display games are 60%. That is, the probability variation rush rate is set to 62%. Then, after the big hit ends, the time saving of 50 rotations and the general electric power support are executed.

It should be noted that the 16R certainty variation rush rate is, for example, 2% for the special figure 1 variable display game, 40% for the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R certainty variation rush rate is, for example, 60% for the special figure 1 variation display game. It may be set such that the distribution of the number of big hits in the probability variation state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is different, such as 22% in the variable display game of FIG. According to this structure, if the odd variation big hit is won in the small hit RUSH mode, it is possible to obtain a large number of game balls even during the big hit game, so that more small hits are generated during the small hit RUSH. In addition to improving the game motivation of the player who is trying to obtain a game ball, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation for the probability variation jackpot winning.

In addition, the occurrence of the probability jackpot RUSH mode triggers the end of the small hit RUSH mode, so the occurrence of the probability jackpot may reduce the player's willingness to play the game, but it is possible to obtain sufficient game balls even with this probability jackpot. Therefore, it becomes possible to give a new game motivation to try to enter the small hit RUSH again while maintaining the game motivation of the player.

[High probability change count update process]
Next, the high probability variation number update processing of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3717 (special figure 1 fluctuation start processing), A3808 (special figure 2 fluctuation start processing)) in the second embodiment. Details will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high-probability variation number updating process in the second embodiment. In the high-probability variation number update processing, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the high-probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A15101). When it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A15101 is “N”), the high-probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

When in the high probability state (result of A15101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state by -1 (1 (A15102). The initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high-probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 times (to be described later in special figure 1 big hit end processing or special figure 2 big hit end processing. ). In addition, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts fluctuating, the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (A15103). When the number of high-probability fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A15103 is "N"), that is, when the high-probability state continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 determines the number of high-probability fluctuations. The update process ends. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (the result of A15103 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to high probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15104).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure high probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15105), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start changing. The high-probability & short-time-less final fluctuation flag is set (A15106), and the high-probability fluctuation count update process is terminated. The high probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag will be described later.

In this way, by performing the high-probability fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment, the second specific game state (high probability) is appropriately changed from the state of the first specific game state (high probability, with electric support). , And there is no power support) (particularly A15105).

[Processing for updating the number of time-saving fluctuations]
Next, the details of the time saving variation number update processing (A13718 (Tokugatsu 1 variation start processing)) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving variation count updating process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a short period of time (state with low probability & electric support) (A15201). When it is not during the time saving (the result of A15201 is “N”), the time saving variation number updating process is ended.

The game control device 100 updates the number of times of hour-shortening by -1 (subtracts only 1) when it is during time saving (low probability & state with electric support) (result of A15201 is "Y") (A15202). The initial value of the number of time saving fluctuations is the number of times the time saving mode is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit ending process or special figure 2 in a second embodiment described later). Jackpot end processing). In addition, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts fluctuating, the number of time-saving fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time saving fluctuations is 0 (A15203). When the number of time saving fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A15203 is “N”), that is, when the time saving mode continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 performs the processing of updating the number of time saving fluctuations. finish. When the number of time saving fluctuations is 0 (result of A15203 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding low probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15204).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15205), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start changing. The low-probability & no time saving final variation flag is set (A15206), and the time saving variation number updating process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the time saving number of times updating process in the second embodiment, the normal game state (low probability, no power support is appropriately performed) from the state of the third specific game state (low probability, power support is provided). ) State (in particular, A15205).

As described above, in the second embodiment, a part of the high-probability variation number processing in the first embodiment is changed, and the time saving variation number updating processing is added. Therefore, as the flags corresponding to the high-probability final fluctuation flag in the first embodiment, a high-probability & non-time saving final fluctuation flag (A15106) and a low-probability & non-time saving final fluctuation flag (A15206) are introduced.

In order to cope with such a change, in the second embodiment, the “high probability final change?” of steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A5728, A5745, A5828, A5848 in the first embodiment is “final change?”. Read as The “final fluctuation” is a final fluctuation that ends the low probability and time saving state, and when the low probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the final fluctuation in the low probability and time saving state has ended. When the high-probability & short-time-less final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability and short-time final fluctuation has ended.

Further, in the second embodiment, the “high probability medium” in steps A2712, A3514, A3607, A5737, and A5837 in the first embodiment is read as “high probability or time saving medium”.

Further, in the second embodiment, the “clear high probability variation frequency region” of step A5907 in the first embodiment is read as “clear high probability variation frequency region and time reduction variation frequency region”. Further, in the second embodiment, “clear high probability final variation flag area” of step A5909 in the first embodiment is read as “clear final variation flag area”.

The "final change flag area" is a high probability & short time final change flag area that stores a high probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag, and a low probability & low time saving final fluctuation that stores a low probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag. Includes flag area.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a first flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 big hit end processing in the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 100 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as a process number to return to the normal process of special figure 1 (A16701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A16702). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit (off data of one big hit signal, off data of three big hits) in the external information output data area (A16703).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16704). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16705). Here, in the second embodiment, the probability variation determination data includes high-probability data (high probability, with power support) and low-probability data (low probability, with power support). When the probability variation determination data is not the low probability data (low probability, with power support) (“N” in step A16705), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start with high probability and time saving in the external information output data area. (A16706). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, there is power support) (“Y” in step A16705), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A16720 and thereafter. The processing after step A16720 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16706, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16707). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16708). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A16709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the high probability in the game state display number area (A16710), saves the number in the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A16711), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A16712). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16713), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring organization flag area (A16714). The area is cleared (A16715).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16716). As a result, in the first specific game state, it is possible to increase the probability of hitting and to execute normal electric power support. Then, in the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Next, while saving the initial value of the high-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation count area for holding the high-probability fluctuation count, the short-time fluctuation count is stored in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the short-time fluctuation count. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16717). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (A16718), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (A16719), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

In the above-mentioned step A16705, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, there is electric power support) (“Y” in step A16705), the game control device 100 issues a signal related to the start with low probability and time saving The data is saved in the external information output data area (A16720).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16721). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16722). After that, the signal related to the right-handing instruction (launching position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A16723).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A16724), saves the right hitting number in the game state display number 2 area (A16725), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A16726). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16727), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud start period flag area (A16728). The area is cleared (A16729).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16730). Thereby, in the third specific game state, it is possible to execute the ordinary electric power support and the time saving mode. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently generated. Next, while saving the initial value of the low-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation count area for holding the low-probability fluctuation count, the time-shortening fluctuation count in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the time-short fluctuation count. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16731). After that, probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery that saves the command output to the performance control device 300 upon power recovery (A16732), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is set to the special figure 2 game process. The data is saved in the timer area (A16733), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

By doing this, after the special figure 1 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, there is electric support)), the winning probability is It is possible to shift to the first specific game state by setting the probability to high and with the support for normal electric power. In addition, when the probability variation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is electric support) after the end of the special figure 1 big hit, the hit probability is set to low probability and there is support for Dentsu. As a result, it is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 is a first flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing in the second embodiment. In addition, FIG. 102 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 2 (A16801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A16802). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit (off data of one big hit signal, off data of three big hits) in the external information output data area (A16803).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16804). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16805). Here, in the second embodiment, the probability variation determination data includes high-probability data (high probability, with power support) and low-probability data (low probability, with power support). When the probability variation determination data is not the low probability data (low probability, with power support) (“N” in step A16805), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability & time saving in the external information output data area. (A16806). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, electric power is supported) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A16820 and subsequent steps. The processing after step A16820 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16806, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16807). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16808). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A16809).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number in the high probability in the game state display number area (A16810), saves the number in the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (A16811), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A16812). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A16813), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring organization flag area (A16814). The area is cleared (A16815).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16816). As a result, in the first specific game state, it is possible to increase the probability of hitting and to execute normal electric power support. Then, in the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Next, while saving the initial value of the high-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation count area for holding the high-probability fluctuation count, the short-time fluctuation count is stored in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the short-time fluctuation count. The initial value of (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16817). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery (A16818), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

In the above-mentioned step A16805, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, there is electric support) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 sends a signal related to the start with low probability and time saving. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A16820).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16821). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16822). After that, the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A16823).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A16824), saves the right hitting number in the game state display number 2 area (A16825), and round LED pointer. The off number is saved in the area (A16826). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16827), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud start period flag area (A16828). The area is cleared (A16829).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16830). Thereby, in the third specific game state, it is possible to execute the ordinary electric power support and the time saving mode. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently generated. Next, while saving the initial value of the low-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation count area for holding the low-probability fluctuation count, the time-shortening fluctuation count in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the time-short fluctuation count. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16831). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16832), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

By doing this, after the special figure 2 big hit ends, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, there is electric support)), the hit probability is It is possible to shift to the first specific game state by setting the probability to high and with the support for normal electric power. Also, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is electric support), the hit probability is set to low probability and there is support for Poden. , It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special drawing 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hitting end processing (A3218) in the special figure 1 game processing of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 small hitting end processing in the second embodiment. In FIG. 103, the process of step A17207 is added between steps A7207 and A7208 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to A7210 have the same contents as in FIG.

In Step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in time saving (A17207). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that the time is not shortening (result of A17207 is “N”), the process of step A7208 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, if the time is shortening (result of A17207 is “Y”), the processes of step A7210 and subsequent steps are executed.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing (A3321) in the special figure 2 game processing of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the second embodiment. In FIG. 104, the process of step A17308 is added between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. Therefore, the processing from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to A7310 have the same contents as in FIG.

In Step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortening (A17308). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that it is not in the time saving period (result of A17308 is “N”), it executes the processing of step A7309. On the other hand, when it is in the time saving period (result of A17308 is “Y”). , Special figure 2 small hit end processing ends.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end process (modified example of the second embodiment)]
A modification of the above-described Toku-zu 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the Toku-zu 1 game process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 105 is a first flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. In addition, FIG. 106 is a second flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

105 and 106 are obtained by adding the processes of steps A19719 to A19723 and the processes of steps A19733 to A19737 to the processes of FIGS. 99 and 100. Therefore, the processes of steps A16701 to A16718 and steps A16720 to A16732 have the same contents as those in FIGS. 99 and 100, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In step A19719, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (A19719). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special display 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of A19719 is "N"), clear the special Fig. 2 game interruption flag area where the special illustration 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19722), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19723), and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (result of A19719 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (A19720), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19721). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. After that, the processes of steps A19722 and A19723 described above are executed, and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

In step A19733, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (A19733). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of A19703 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19736), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19737), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (result of A19733 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. A command is prepared (A19734), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19735). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. After that, the processes of steps A19736 and A19737 described above are executed, and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

It can be said that FIGS. 105 and 106 are modifications of the modification of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the first embodiment so that they can be applied to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the toku-zu 1 big hit ending process in the first embodiment, the following effects in the second embodiment are provided. That is, after the special figure 1 big hit, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)), the winning probability is set to a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state with the presence of the ordinary electric power support. In addition, when the probability variation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is electric support) after the special figure 1 big hit is finished, the hit probability is set to low probability and the ordinary electric power support is set. , It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing (modified example of the second embodiment)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the aforementioned special figure 2 game process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 is a first flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. FIG. 108 is a second flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

107 and 108 are obtained by adding the processes of steps A19819 to A19722 and the processes of steps A19833 to A19836 to the processes in FIGS. 101 and 102. Therefore, the processes of steps A16801 to A16818 and steps A16820 to A16832 have the same contents as those in FIGS. 101 and 102, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In step A19819, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (A19819). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of A19819 is "N"), the Toku-zu 1 game-interrupt flag area in which the Toku-zu 1 game-interrupt flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19822), 2 The big hit ending process ends.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (the result of A19819 is "Y"), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing to restart the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (A19820), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19821). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for resuming decoration special figure 1 can execute the process for resuming the variable display game for decoration special figure 1. After that, the above-mentioned processing of step A19822 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

In Step A19833, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (A19833). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is not suspended (the result of A19833 is "N"), the Toku-zu 1 game-interrupt flag area in which the Toku-zu 1 game-interrupt flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19836), 2 The big hit ending process ends.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of A19833 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. It is prepared as a command (A19834), and effect command setting processing is executed (A19835). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for resuming decoration special figure 1 can execute the process for resuming the variable display game for decoration special figure 1. After that, the above-mentioned processing of step A19836 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

It can be said that FIGS. 107 and 108 are modifications of the modification of the special figure 2 big hit end processing in the first embodiment so that they can be applied to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the first embodiment, the following effects in the second embodiment are provided. That is, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with normal communication support)) after the special figure 2 big hit ends, the hit probability is set to be high probability. It is possible to shift to the first specific game state with the electric support. In addition, after the end of the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is Hoden support), the hit probability is low probability, and Hoden support is provided, It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 small hitting end processing according to the modification. In FIG. 109, the process of step A17207 is added between step A7207 and step A7208 in FIG. 69A. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to S8814 have the same contents as those in FIG. 69A, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In Step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortening (A17207). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that the time is not shortening (result of A17207 is “N”), the process of step A7208 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, when the time is shortening (the result of A17207 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step S8810 and the subsequent steps.

It can be said that FIG. 109 is a modification of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the first embodiment so that it can be applied to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the first embodiment, the following effects are achieved. That is, according to the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 Small hit end processing (modified example)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing (A3321) in the special figure 2 game processing of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 small hitting end processing according to the modified example. In FIG. 110, the process of step A17308 is added between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. 69B. Therefore, the processes of steps A7301 to A7308 and the processes of steps A7309 to S8914 have the same contents as in FIG. 69B, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In Step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during time saving (A17308). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that the time is not shortening (the result of A17308 is “N”), the process of step A7309 and thereafter is executed. On the other hand, when it is in the time saving period (the result of A17308 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process of step A8911 and thereafter.

It can be said that FIG. 109 is a modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in the first embodiment so that it can be applied to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit ending process in the first embodiment, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by the above process, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A11310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the public figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A17601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 monitors the input from the ordinary electric prize opening switch which detects the award (ball) to the award opening (normal electric prize opening) of the normal variation winning device 33. Is executed (A17602). In the second embodiment, unlike the prior art, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored according to the winning of the Poden prize hole. Therefore, the ordinary electric prize opening is included in the category of the first starting winning opening 36, and the ordinary electric prize switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a. The details of the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100, if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts only 1) (A17603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A17604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A17604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A17605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A17606). Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A17607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A17607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the general figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the general figure fluctuation display game, sets effect, and so on. The ordinary figure normal process for setting information necessary for performing the ordinary figure change process is executed (A17608). Details of the normal/universal process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

Further, when the game process number is “1” in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A17609). Details of the processing for changing the normal figure will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “2” in step A17607 and the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. Processing for displaying a general figure, such as setting of the opening time and setting of information necessary for performing the processing for hitting a general figure, is executed (A17610). The details of the processing for displaying a general figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

If the game process number is "3" in step A17607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the normal hitting process or performing the normal electric remaining ball process. The middle hit process is executed (A17611). The details of the normal drawing hit processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 118.

Further, when the game process number is "4" in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the per-universal-drawing ending process (A17612). ). Details of the processing for remaining balls in the universal figure will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary process normal process (A17608). (A17613). Details of the per-universal-drawing ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A17614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A17615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A17604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A17614 and subsequent steps.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A17601 in the universal figure game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A17701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (result of A17701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A17702). Here, the gaming state to hit right is a big hit state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state. If it is in the game state of hitting to the right (result of A17702 is “Y”), the process moves to step A17705. When the game state is not right hitting (the result of A17702 is "N"), a left hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A17703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A17704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handing instruction notification command executes the notification (warning) for instructing left-handing by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved universal figures and determines whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A17705). When the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (the result of A17705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved universal figures by +1 (A17706), and corresponds to the number of reserved universal figures after the update. Then, the address of the random number storage area is calculated (A17707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (A17708), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A17709), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A17701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of reserved universal figures is not less than the upper limit value, the gaming control device 100 (result of A17705 is " N"), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Prize winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process (A17602) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring process. In addition, as described above, the ordinary prize winning opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 92).

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the universal figure is hit, that is, whether or not the universal figure variation display game is in the hit state and the ordinary variation winning device 33 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A17801). Then, if it is in the middle of hitting the normal figure (result of A17801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special electric prize opening switch (A17802). When there is an input to the ordinary electric prize opening switch (result of A17802 is "Y"), the count number of the ordinary electric power counter is updated by +1 (A17803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated count value of the general electric counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 6) (A17804). When the count number reaches the upper limit value (result of A17804 is “Y”), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the end point pointer area in the RWM in the universal map, and the hit end pointer value is stored in the RWM. Is saved in the middle control pointer area (A17805).

Finally, the universal figure game processing timer is cleared (A17806), and the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring processing is ended. That is, when there is a prize winning of the upper limit or more in the hit state of the universal figure, the value of the end of hit is saved in the universal figure winning process control pointer area at that time, and the normal variation winning device 33 is closed. Therefore, the hit state of the universal figure ends in the middle.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the middle of hitting a normal figure (result of A17801 is “N”), it is determined that there is no input to the ordinary electric prize opening switch (result of A17802 is “N”). ), or if it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (result of A17804 is “N”), the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A17608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary figure ordinary processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the universal figure reservation number is 0 (A17901). If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A17901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per ordinary figure of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per symbol of RWM of the figure is stored. Loads a random number per design from (for hold number 1), clears the random number per universal figure storage area (for hold number 1) and the random number per universal figure storage area (for hold number 1) to 0 (A17902) ). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal is in the high probability of being in a regular figure (during a high probability state), that is, whether it is a time-saving state (a state of the universal power support state). It is determined (A17903). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

The game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal figure low probability when the normal figure high probability is not (the result of A17903 is “N”) (A17904). If it is during the high probability of universal figure (the result of A17903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the high probability of universal figure is set (A17905), and step A17906 is executed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A17906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of universal figure and the low probability of regular figure. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (result of A17906 is “Y”), that is, if there is no match, the process proceeds to step A17908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A17906 is "N"), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A17907).

If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A17907 is “Y”), that is, if the hit random number, the game controller 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A17908). Further, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A17909), and the deviation symbol information is saved in the universal figure stop symbol information area (A17910), and the process proceeds to step A17914.

If the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A17907 is “N”), that is, if it is a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A17911), and the hit symbol random number is loaded. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A17912), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A17913), and the process proceeds to step A17914. It should be noted that there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and in the present embodiment, there are three (1 per ordinary figure, 2 per ordinary figure, 3 per ordinary figure).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (A17914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A17915), and shifts the random number storage area per universal symbol. (A17916) After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A17917), the number of universal figure reservations is updated by -1 (A17918).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 are advanced one by one. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of retained figures of 4 for general figures are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 for general figures in the random number storage area for one figure to 3 for the number of retained figures Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the fluctuation pattern random number 3 (A17919), sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the universal figure game processing timer area (A17920). For example, the variation time is divided into 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. Then, the process shift setting process during normal figure change is executed (A17921), and the normal figure normal process ends. It should be noted that the general-university-during-process transition setting process will be described later.

Further, when the number of reserved universal figures is 0 (result of A17901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets “0” as a process number for shifting to regular processing of regular figures (A17922). , The processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A17923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (A17924), and the ordinary processing routine processing is ended.

[Usually changing the processing during the transition process]
FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process change setting process during normal figure change. The normal figure changing processing transition setting processing is executed in step A17921 in the normal figure normal processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first sets "1" as a processing number for shifting to the processing during variation of the universal figure (A18101), and saves the processing number in the universal figure game processing number area (A18102).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the universal figure variation display game (normal symbol 1 varying signal is ON) in the test signal output data area (A18103), and the universal figure variation display game is varying. The changing flag indicating that is saved in the universal figure change control flag area (A18104). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the universal figure display, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area (A18105), and the initial value (here Then, 0) is saved (A18106). After that, the processing for setting transition during routine change ends.

[Processing during fluctuations in general figure]
Next, the details of the processing for changing the figure-to-body (A17609) in the figure-to-body game process will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process of changing the universal figure.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying general figure (A18301), and saves the process number in the general figure game process number area (A18302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the universal figure display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) which is the display time of the result of the universal figure variation display game on the universal figure display in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18303). ..

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of variation of the universal figure (normal symbol 1 varying signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A18304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the general/universal figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the general/universal figure variation control flag area (A18305), and the general/universal figure variation processing is ended.

[Processing during normal display]
Next, the details of the normal figure displaying process (A17610) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process of displaying a universal figure.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or deviance information) set in the normal figure normal process (A18401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A18402). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A18403).

When the hit information is set in the hit flag (the result of A18403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a hitting process setting table (A18404) and hits corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information. The start pointer value (here, a value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per universal figure) is acquired and saved in the medium control pointer area per universal figure (A18405). Further, the hit end pointer value (here, a value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per universal figure) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the per universal figure end pointer area (A18406). Then, the universal communication opening time (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per universal figure) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18407). By the above process, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 33 is set during the probability change state or the time saving state (during the normal power support state), and the opening can be performed, for example, three times or twice.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the process number for shifting to the process of hitting a normal figure (A18408), and saves the process number in the figure game process number area (A18409). After that, the signal regarding the hit of the general figure fluctuation display game (ordinary symbol 1 hitting medium signal is turned on) and the signal regarding the start of normal electric actuation (ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A18410). Further, the on data is saved in the universal solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the universal solenoid 33b (A18411).

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information of the ordinary electric charge count area in which the number of prizes to the ordinary variable prize device 33 is stored (A18412), and determines the number of prizes to the ordinary variable prize device 33 in the ordinary electric charge fraud monitoring period. The stored information on the fraudulent prize winning number area is cleared (A18413). Finally, the flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning a prize device 33 is saved in the normal communication fraud monitoring period flag area (A18414).

When the hit information is not set in the hit flag (result of A18403 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 sets "0" as a process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (A18415). , The processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A18416). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (A18417), and the process of displaying the universal figure ends.

[Usually hit processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure hitting process (A17611) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a process of hitting a normal figure.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares a control pointer during the universal figure hitting (A18601), and the value of the loaded control pointer during the universal figure hits is the value of the upper limit value pointer area during the universal figure hit (end of hit). Value) is determined (A18602).

Then, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the universal figure hit does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the universal figure hit (the result of A18602 is "N"), the control during the universal figure hit The pointer is updated by +1 (A18603). Further, the ordinary electric power operation shift setting process is executed (A18604), and the ordinary figure hitting mid-time process ends. The details of the normal power operation shift setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the universal figure hits the value in the upper limit area of the control pointer during the universal figure (the value of the end of hit), the game control device 100 (the result of A18602 is “Y”), In step A18603, the ordinary-university-game process control pointer area is not updated (+1), but the ordinary-electrical-operation shift setting process is executed (A18604).

[Uden operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation shift setting process (A18604) in the normal figure hitting process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power operation shift setting process. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 33b for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 33, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A18701). Note that here, the control pointer uses the value before being updated in step A18603. If the value of the control pointer is either 0, 2, or 5, the process proceeds to step A18702 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 33, and therefore the normal variation winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer. The wait time (for example, 300 msec) after the blockage is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18702).

Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn off the normal power solenoid 33b (A1873), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A18704 and controls the opening of the normal variation winning device 33, and therefore corresponds to the control pointer. The ordinary electric prize opening time (eg, 1700 msec) which is the opening time of the normal variation winning device 33 is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18704). Further, ON data is set in the universal electric solenoid output data area in order to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 33b (A18705), and the ordinary electric power operation shift setting processing is ended.

When the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A18706 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 33, and thus the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer. The normal electric open time (for example, 2600 msec), which is the open time of 33, is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (A18706). Further, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 33b (A18707), and the general electric operation shift setting process ends.

Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the game control device 100 moves to step A18708 to end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 33 and complete the ordinary electric ball processing ( In order to execute (A17612), "4" is set as the process number (A18708), and the process number is saved in the universal figure game process number area (A18709).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the general figure game processing timer area (A18710). After that, the OFF data is saved in the ordinary power solenoid output data area in order to set the ordinary power solenoid 33b to OFF (A18711), and the ordinary power operation transition setting process ends.

[Universal residual ball treatment]
Next, details of the normal electric ball remaining ball process (A17612) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first sets a process number “5” related to the end process of the universal figure (A18901), and saves the process number in the universal figure game process number area (A18902). After that, the universal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18903).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of operation of the normal variation winning device 33 (normal electric auditor product 1 operating signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A18904). Then, the ordinary electric count number area for counting the number of prizes to the normal variable winning apparatus 33 is cleared (A18905), and further, the control pointer area for hitting a normal figure is cleared (A18906). After that, the per-universal-diagram end pointer area is cleared (A18907), and the ordinary electric power remaining ball processing ends.

[Usually end processing]
Next, the details of the per-universal-drawing end process (A17613) in the general-university game process will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the per-universal figure end processing.

The game control device 100 first sets a process number “0” related to the normal/universal figure normal process (A19101), and further saves the process number in the general/universal figure game process number area (A19102). After that, the signal regarding the hit end of the universal figure fluctuation game (normal symbol 1 hitting signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A19103).

Further, the game control device 100 saves the flag (the flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 33 in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A19104), and then ends the per-university drawing process. To finish.

[Operation and effect of the second embodiment]
The operation and effect of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 122 is a time chart of the operation of the first special variation winning device 38 in the small hit RUSH. 122, in order to explain the operation of the first special variation winning device 38 in the second specific game state, the execution state and the stopped state of the special figure 2 variable display game (described as "special figure 2 game"), The execution state of the small hitting operation, the opening/closing state of the lower big winning opening (the winning opening of the first special variation winning device 38), and the state of the game ball near the opening/closing door of the lower large winning opening are shown.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment changes the sliding type opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c of the first special winning device 38 from the closed state to the open state when a small hit (first special game state) is generated. Convert. The first special winning device 38 has a configuration in which the game balls are retained on the open/close door (open/close member) 38c when the open/close door (open/close member) 38c is in the closed state. Further, when the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c is in the open state, the game balls accumulated on the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c can be won. As a result, even if the open state is a short hit, many game balls can be won by the game balls retained in the open/close door (opening/closing member) 38c entering the first special prize device 38. In the specific game state, it is possible to efficiently increase the number of balls.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the above-mentioned small hit RUSH occurs in the second specific gaming state, the variation starts each time the second start winning port 37 is won. As shown in FIG. 96, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is set to be extremely high in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and the special figure 2 is set in the second specific game state. The fluctuation of the fluctuation display game is set to short fluctuation. Therefore, the small hit operation occurs one after another.

When a small hit occurs, the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times (e.g., eight times) for each small hit. During the small hitting operation (first special game state), the open state time of the lower special winning opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is set shorter than the closed state time. For example, the closing time of the special winning opening may be 1.2 seconds, while the opening time may be 0.2 seconds.

The special variation winning device unit that constitutes the first special variation winning device 38 has a configuration in which the downward force of the game ball on the opening/closing door 38c is weakened (see, for example, JP-A-2017-77362). As a result, the game balls are likely to stay on the opening/closing door 38c.

In such a structure, when a small hit RUSH occurs in which a small hit occurs frequently, the closed state of the lower special winning opening is set to be longer than the open state. The game ball can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c. After that, since the opening/closing door 38c is opened, many game balls staying on the opening/closing door 38c will win the lower special winning opening at once. As a result, when the small hit RUSH occurs, a lot of prize balls can be given to the player.

By doing so, in the probability variation loop type gaming machine 10 as in the second embodiment, the small hit RUSH can be executed in the second specific gaming state after exiting the first specific gaming state. , A new game property can be realized in which the more balls fit, the more game balls can be acquired.

Note that, with reference to FIG. 122, when a small hit occurs in a predetermined variable display game and a small hit occurs in the next variable display game of the predetermined variable display game, in the next variable display game, A period for securing the flow-down and staying state of the game balls can be secured by the variation period of the identification information. As a result, when the small hitting operation continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c by utilizing the variable time of the subsequent game. Then, a large number of game balls retained on the opening/closing door 38c can be swiftly awarded to the lower special winning opening to give a large number of prize balls to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, when the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific game state after the end of the big hit (second special game state), the small hit mode ( Since it is shifted to the second specific game state in which the first special result) can be derived, it is possible to perform a novel game state transition that has never been seen before. Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, it is possible to efficiently change the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) in which many small hits are allocated.

[Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 138. It should be noted that the configurations that are not described in the third embodiment are applicable to the configurations common to the first embodiment.

In addition, the third embodiment is directed to the game board 30 of FIG. 2 (note that a modified example described later is excluded). Then, when one of the special display 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game has a winning result, the other variable display game is forcibly ended with the disengagement result. The same applies to the case of suspension/resumption instead of forced termination.

In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the special figure 2 starting prize winning memory (special figure 2 starting memory, second starting memory, special figure 2 hold) accumulates up to an upper limit value (eg, 4) larger than 1. The special figure 2 starting prize is not invalidated during execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during a big hit. Therefore, the special figure starting port 2 switch processing, the special figure 2 normal processing, and the fluctuation start information setting processing are changed from the first embodiment as follows.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure starting port 2 switch processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure starting port 2 switch process (A2718) in the starting port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 loads the number of times the starting port 2 signal is output, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 37a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 (A3001). Further, the value of the loaded number of output signals of the starting port 2 is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A3003).

When the output count does not overflow (result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start mouth 2 signal output count area of the RWM (A3004). On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3015 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 suspension (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A3015). When the special figure 2 reservation number is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A3015 is “N”), the special figure starting port 2 switch processing is ended.

When the special figure 2 reservation number is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3015 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3016), and the special figure 2 reservation number is +1. It is updated (A3017). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reserved (A3018), and outputs the jackpot random numbers prepared in the hard random number acquisition process to the jackpot random number storage area of RWM. Save to (A3019). Subsequently, a jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A3020), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3021). Furthermore, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3022). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) corresponding to the RWM ( A3023).

Next, the game control device 100 executes special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, pre-determination processing) for determining special figure reservation information (A3024), and the decoration special figure 2 reservation number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number. A command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3025), effect command setting processing is executed (A3026), and the special figure starting port 2 switch processing is ended. In this way, when the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is generated, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

In the third embodiment, the special figure hold information determination process is also executed for the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning opening 37. Become. Therefore, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop design command) and pre-reading variation system command (pre-reading variation pattern command) for special figure 2 starting memory (special figure 2 reservation) is transmitted from game control control equipment 100 to production control control equipment 300. ..

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 normal processing according to the third embodiment. In the special figure 2 game process, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 normal process (A3311). The process other than steps A3605a and A3605b is the same as the special process 2 normal process (FIG. 22) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure reserved number command (decorative special figure 2 reserved number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number as an effect command (A3605a). , Production command setting processing is executed (A3605b).

Therefore, in the third embodiment, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes fluctuation start information setting processing (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. Note that the processes other than steps A5021, A5022, and A5023 are the same as the fluctuation start information setting process (FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

When information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5017 is "N"), that is, when information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 hold number is updated by -1 ( A5021), the contents of the random number storage area relating to the special figure 2 variable display game are shifted (A5022), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5023), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 variation start process. Note that the processes other than A4308a-1 are the same as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 29A) of the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

After Step A4308a, in Step A4308a-1, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state are saved. Thereby, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information after the end of the big hit (big hit state) as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game are set. That is, based on the current probability state (high probability state or normal game state (low probability state)) and the big hit symbol, the special figure 1 special mode 1 special mode and special figure 2 dramatic mode after the big hit by the special figure 1 variable display game Will be set.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. Note that the processes other than A4308b-1 are the same as the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 29B) of the first embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

After Step A4308a, in Step A4308b-1, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state are saved. Thereby, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information after the end of the big hit (big hit state) as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game are set. That is, based on the current probability state (high-probability state or normal game state (low-probability state)) and the big hit symbol, the special figure 1 effect mode and the special figure 2 effect mode after the end of the big hit by the special figure 2 variable display game. Will be set.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 variation start process. Note that the processes other than A4402 are the same as the Toku-zu 1 information setting process (FIG. 30) of the first embodiment, and description thereof is omitted.

In step A4402, unlike the first embodiment, the game control device 100 sets the variation pattern selection information table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode information. Therefore, when not in the high probability state (probability change state), that is, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game (first variable display game) includes the special figure 1 effect mode number. It will be set according to the mode information. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern that is the variation mode particularly includes information on the variation time. Details of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game will be described later (FIG. 137(B)). As will be described later, the special figure 1 effect mode information (particularly the special figure 1 effect mode number) changes according to the number of executions (variation number, rotation number, game number) of the special figure 1 variable display game, The variation pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is set according to the number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The processing other than step A4502 and the added step A4506a is the same as the special figure 2 information setting processing (FIG. 31) of the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

In step A4502, unlike the first embodiment, the game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode information. Therefore, in the case of the high probability state (probability change state), the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) is set according to the special figure 2 effect mode information including the special figure 2 effect mode number. Will be. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern that is the variation mode particularly includes information on the variation time.

In the normal gaming state, the latter half offset data (A4507) for long-time fluctuation causes the special figure 2 variable display game to have a long fluctuation (long fluctuation time) fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation display game in FIG. 2 basically has a fluctuation pattern of short fluctuation (short fluctuation time, for example, 1 sec). However, even in the high-probability state, when reach occurs, and in the case of high-probability final fluctuation (final fluctuation of high-probability state), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is longer than the short fluctuation and is of medium degree. It is a variable time (for example, 20 seconds). The medium fluctuation time is shorter than the long fluctuation (for example, 10 minutes). Details of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game will be described later (FIG. 137(B)).

In step A4506a, after step A4505 or A4506, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 effect mode number is the special mode number (here, the specific number 50). If the special figure 2 effect mode number is the number of the special mode (specific number 50 here) (result of A4506a is "Y"), the game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure 2 effect mode information in step A4502. The variable pattern selection information table to be set is set. As will be described later, the special figure 2 effect mode information (particularly, the special figure 2 effect mode number) changes according to the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (number of changes, number of revolutions, number of games). The variation pattern of the 2-variable display game is set according to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, the game control device 100 changes the special figure 2 variable display game for a long time only when the special figure 2 effect mode number is not the special mode number (specific number 50 here) (the result of A4506a is "N"). The second half offset data for use is set (A4507). Therefore, as will be described later, until the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is within a predetermined number after the probability change state (ST) ends, the special figure 2 variable display game has long fluctuations (long fluctuation time, The fluctuation pattern of 10 minutes, for example, is not set, but the fluctuation pattern of short fluctuation (short fluctuation time, for example, 1 sec) is set. Here, the predetermined number of times is the upper limit value "4" of the special figure 2 reservation number or the special figure 2 reservation number at the end of the probability variation.

As a result, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the normal gaming state, the special figure based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (establishment of the second starting condition) in the probability changing state (specific gaming state) A short-time fluctuation pattern can be set for the two-variation display game, that is, for the special-figure 2 variation display game based on the special-figure 2 starting memory (second starting memory) that occurred during the probability variation state. ..

Temporarily, in the normal game state after the end of the probability change state (small hit RUSH state), the long-term fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) for the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 starting memory generated during the probability change state. If is set, the player stops the game and leaves the game machine 10, and there is a possibility that a big hit of this special figure 2 variable display game will occur in the unattended state (the possibility of an unmanned big hit). However, there arises a problem such as a disadvantage to the player. However, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of unmanned jackpots by setting a short-time fluctuation pattern for the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 starting memory that occurred during the probability change state.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 displaying process (second half) according to the third embodiment. In the special figure 1 game process, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 displaying process (A3210). The processing other than steps A5743a and A5753a-A5753e is the same as the processing in FIG.

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, the game control device 100, after step A5743, the special figure 1 effect regarding the setting of the special figure 1 effect mode which is the effect mode related to the special figure 1 variable display game. The mode information check processing is executed (A5743a), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing is executed (A5744). Further, the game control device 100 also executes the special figure 1 effect mode information check process after step A5753 even when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (A5753a). The details of the special figure 1 effect mode information check processing will be described later.

After step A5753a, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining rotation speed (special figure 1 switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode number (A5753b), and special figure 1 effect. It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed (the number of special game production remaining games) and the special rotation speed for preparation for switching to special map 1 match (A5753c). It should be noted that the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining rotation speed may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of special figure 1 effect modes, or may be different among the plurality of special figure 1 effect modes. The same value (rotation speed) may be used in any one of the effect modes, or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of special figure 1 effect modes.

When the special figure 1 effect remaining rotational speed and the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining rotational speed do not match (result of A5753c is “N”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A5754.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed and the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining speed match (the result of A5753c is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces the special figure 1 effect mode switching preparation command. (A5753d), and after performing the effect command setting process (A5753e), the process proceeds to step A5754. The special figure 1 effect mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a particular effect such as a look-ahead effect from several rotations before the special figure 1 effect mode is switched (before several games), and the effect control device 300 By receiving a special figure 1 effect mode switching preparation command as a command for effect mode switching, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the effect across a plurality of special figure 1 effect modes (single-shot system command processing B1317, B1318).

Alternatively, in step A5753b, the total switching preparation remaining rotation speed (total switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode number is set, and in step A5753c, the total effect remaining rotation speed (total effect remaining game number). ) And the total number of revolutions remaining for preparation for switching may match. By doing this, the effect control device 300 performs the prefetch effect by receiving the special figure 1 effect mode switching preparation command before a few games in which the total effect remaining rotational speed becomes zero and the probability variation state shifts to the normal game state. It can be prohibited (single-shot system command processing B1317, B1318). The total effect remaining rotation speed is the remaining rotation speed up to the effect mode change regarding the total rotation speed (number of executions) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

[Special figure 1 production mode information check processing]
131 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 effect mode information check processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 effect mode information check process (A5743a, A5753a) in the process of displaying the special figure 1. The special figure 1 effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is other than a big hit (small hit or out).

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure primary mode transition information is a non-updated code (A20101). When the special figure primary mode transition information is a code without update (the result of A20101 is “Y”), the special figure 1 effect mode information check processing is ended. In this case, the special figure 1 effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, and for example, the high probability state continues until the next big hit. Is selected.

Further, when the special map primary mode transition information is not the code without update (the result of A20101 is “N”), the game control device 100 indicates that the special map 1 variable display game is in a high probability state (probable change state, small hit RUSH state). ), it is determined whether or not it has started (A20102). When the special figure 1 variable display game is started with a high probability state (the result of A20102 is “Y”), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which are necessary until the production mode is changed. The total effect remaining rotation speed (total effect remaining game number), which is the total rotation speed, is updated by -1 (decrement by 1) (A20103). In the present embodiment, since the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine, at the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), the total effect remaining rotational speed is a predetermined number of times (the number of continuing games) of the high-probability state (for example, the number of continuous games). It is set to 50 times, the number of high probability fluctuations (initial value). The number of continuations is the number of times that continuation is possible, and when a big hit occurs, the high probability state ends.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the total effect remaining rotation speed is 0, that is, whether or not the high-probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) has ended (A20104). When the total effect remaining rotation speed is not 0 (result of A20104 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues, the special figure 1 effect mode information check processing is ended. On the other hand, if the total effect remaining rotational speed is 0 (result of A20104 is “Y”), that is, if the high probability state ends, the process proceeds to step A20107.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not started in the high probability state (the result of A20102 is “N”), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in the normal game state, The game control device 100 updates the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of rotations (the number of executions) of the special figure 1 variable display game required until the change of the special figure 1 effect mode, by -1 (A20105), and the special figure. It is determined whether or not the one effect remaining rotation speed is 0 (A20106). The special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed is the number of remaining rotations until the special figure 1 effect mode is changed regarding the rotation speed (number of executions) of the special figure 1 variable display game. When the special figure 1 production remaining rotational speed is not 0 (the result of A20106 is "N"), the special figure 1 production mode information check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed becomes 0 (the result of A20106 is “Y”), that is, when changing the special figure 1 effect mode from the next special figure 1 variable display game, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table (A20107), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the special figure primary mode transition information (A20108).

Then, the game control device 100 obtains the special figure 1 effect mode number of the special figure 1 effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the special figure 1 effect mode number area in the RWM (A20109), and moves to the special figure 1 effect. Acquire the special figure 1 production remaining rotational speed (initial value) of the mode, save it in the special figure 1 production remaining rotational speed area in the RWM (A20110), and use it when ending the special figure 1 production mode to be transferred this time. The special figure primary mode transition information to be obtained is acquired and saved in the special figure primary mode transition information area in the RWM (A20111).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set special figure 1 effect mode number as an effect command (A20112), and executes effect command setting processing (A20113). Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A20114), and effect command setting processing is executed (A20115). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number (initial value) of the new special figure 1 production mode as a production command (A20116), and a production command setting process (A20117). ) Is executed. It is not necessary to set the number of high-probability fluctuations (initial value) in the new special figure 1 effect mode after the end of the probability variation state, and therefore the processes of steps A20116 and A20117 may not be executed.

The probability information command includes a probability state after the end of the big hit state (special game state), the presence/absence of time saving (universal power support), information on the effect mode, and the like. In addition, in the present embodiment, since there is no ordinary variable winning device 33 and there is no time saving (universal power support), the probability information command may not include information regarding the presence or absence of time saving (general power support).

Next, it is determined whether or not the new special figure 1 effect mode is the left-handed mode (A20118), and if it is not the left-handed mode (the result of A20118 is “N”), the effect mode information check processing is performed. finish. In the case of the left-handed mode (result of A20118 is “Y”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A20119), effect command setting processing is executed (A20120), and effect mode is set. The information check process ends.

Through the above process, the effect control device 300 that has received the probability information command indicating the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) executes the probability information setting process of setting the probability state and performing the process corresponding to the probability state. Yes (single-shot system command processing B1313, B1314). In addition, the production control device 300 which receives the production revolution number command can set the special production 1 production remaining revolutions of the new special production 1 production mode, and thereafter receives the decorative special production 1 stop command as a command for stopping the symbol. Each time the special figure 1 effect remaining rotational speed is updated by -1 (decrease by 1), the subsequent special figure 1 effect residual rotational speed can be managed. As a result, the effect control device 300 can switch the effect according to the switching (end) of the special figure 1 effect mode, or can perform the effect of notifying the change before the special figure 1 effect mode is switched. Furthermore, the production control device 300 that has received the high probability variation number command (initial value) can set the high probability variation number (initial value) of the new special figure 1 production mode. The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handing instruction notification command can display a left-handing instruction display for instructing left-handing on the display device 41.

In this way, the game control device 100 is independent of the special figure 2 effect mode, and is in accordance with the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed corresponding to the number of revolutions (number of executions) of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is possible to manage the effect mode and execute the game control corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode during the stay. Then, the effect control device 300, which has received the command corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode, causes the effect corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode during the stay, such as generating a specific effect only in the particular special figure 1 effect mode. It becomes possible to control the execution of the game, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Further, since the transition from the high probability state to the normal game state is managed not by the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed but by the total effect remaining rotation speed, no problem occurs.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 displaying process (second half) according to the third embodiment. In the special figure 2 game process, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 displaying process (A3313). Note that the processing other than steps A5846a and A5856a to A5856e is the same as the processing in FIG.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the game control device 100, after step A5846, the special figure 2 effect regarding the setting of the special figure 2 effect mode which is the effect mode related to the special figure 2 variable display game. The mode information check process is executed (A5846a), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process shift setting process is executed (A5847). Also, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 effect mode information check process after step A5856 even when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (A5856a). The details of the special figure 2 effect mode information check processing will be described later.

After step A5856a, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining rotation speed (special figure 2 switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode number (A5856b), and the special figure 2 effect. It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed (special figure 2 production remaining game number) and the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining rotation number match (A5856c). In addition, the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining rotation speed may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of special figure 2 effect modes, or may be different among the plurality of special figure 2 effect modes. It may be the same value (rotation speed) in any one of the effect modes, or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of special figure 2 effect modes.

When the special figure 2 production remaining rotational speed and the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining rotational speed do not match (result of A5856c is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A5857.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed and the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining speed match (the result of A5856c is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces the special figure 2 effect mode switching preparation command. (A5856d), after performing the effect command setting process (A5856e), the process proceeds to step A5857. The special figure 2 effect mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a particular effect such as prefetch effect from several rotations before the special figure 2 effect mode is switched (before several games), and the effect control device 300, By receiving a special figure 2 effect mode switching preparation command as a command for effect mode switching, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the effect across a plurality of special figure 2 effect modes (single-shot system command processing B1317, B1318).

As an alternative, in step A5856b, the total switching preparation remaining rotation speed (total switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode number is set, and in step A5856c, the total effect remaining rotation speed (total effect remaining game number). ) And the total number of revolutions remaining for preparation for switching may match. In this way, the effect control device 300 performs the prefetch effect by receiving the special figure 2 effect mode switching preparation command before the number of games in which the total effect remaining rotational speed becomes zero and the probability variation state shifts to the normal game state. It can be prohibited (single-shot system command processing B1317, B1318). The total effect remaining rotation speed is the remaining rotation speed up to the effect mode change regarding the total rotation speed (number of executions) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

[Special figure 2 production mode information check processing]
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 effect mode information check processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 effect mode information check process (A5846a, A5856a) in the special figure 2 displaying process. The special figure 2 effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is other than a big hit (small hit or miss).

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure secondary mode transition information is a non-updated code (A20201). When the special figure secondary mode transition information is a code without update (the result of A20201 is “Y”), the special figure 2 effect mode information check processing is ended. In this case, the special figure 2 effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and for example, the high probability state continues until the next big hit. Is selected.

Further, when the special map secondary mode transition information is not the code without update (the result of A20201 is “N”), the game control device 100 has a high probability state of the special figure 2 variable display game (probable change state, small hit RUSH state). ), it is determined whether it is started (A20202). When the special figure 2 variable display game is started with a high probability state (the result of A20202 is “Y”), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which are necessary until the production mode is changed. The total production remaining rotation number (total production remaining game number), which is the total rotation number, is updated by -1 (decrement by 1) (A20203). In the present embodiment, since the gaming machine is an ST machine, at the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), the total effect remaining rotation speed is a predetermined number (for example, 50 times, the high-probability fluctuation number (initial value)). It is set.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the total effect remaining rotation speed is 0, that is, whether or not the high-probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) has ended (A20204). When the total effect remaining rotation speed is not 0 (the result of A20204 is “N”), that is, when the high-probability state continues, the special figure 2 effect mode information check processing is ended. On the other hand, when the total effect remaining rotation speed is 0 (result of A20204 is “Y”), that is, when the high-probability state ends, the process proceeds to step A20207.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not started in the high probability state (the result of A20202 is “N”), that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started in the normal game state, The game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of rotations (the number of executions) of the special figure 2 variable display game required until the change of the special figure 2 effect mode, by -1 (A20205), and the special figure. 2 It is determined whether or not the number of remaining revolutions for rendering has become 0 (A20206). The special figure 2 effect remaining rotational speed is the number of revolutions remaining until the special figure 2 effect mode is changed regarding the rotational speed (number of executions) of the special figure 2 variable display game. If the special figure 2 effect remaining rotational speed is not 0 (result of A20206 is "N"), the special figure 2 effect mode information check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed becomes 0 (the result of A20206 is "Y"), that is, when changing the special figure 2 effect mode from the next special figure 2 variable display game, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 production mode information address table (A20207), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the special figure secondary mode transition information (A20208).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the special figure 2 effect mode number of the special figure 2 effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the special figure 2 effect mode number area in the RWM (A20209), and moves to the special figure 2 effect. Acquire the special figure 2 production remaining rotational speed (initial value) of the mode, save it in the special figure 2 production remaining rotational speed area in the RWM (A20210), and use it when ending the special figure 2 production mode to be transferred this time. The special figure secondary mode transition information to be obtained is acquired and saved in the special figure secondary mode transition information area in the RWM (A20211).

In addition, in the case where the total effect remaining rotational speed is 0 (the result of A20204 is “Y”), that is, when the high-probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) ends, the special figure to be shifted in step A20209 The special figure 2 effect mode number of the 2 effect mode becomes the number of the special mode (specific number 50 here), and the special figure 2 effect mode shifts to the special mode. Then, in step A20210, the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the special figure 2 effect mode (special mode) to be shifted becomes the upper limit value "4" of the special figure 2 holding number (A3015 in FIG. 123). .. In addition, this special figure 2 production remaining rotational speed (initial value) may be set to the current special figure 2 holding number at the end of the high probability state (probability change state). Therefore, in the special mode, after the high-probability state ends, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is within a predetermined number of times (here, the upper limit value of the special figure 2 reserved number is “4” or the special figure 2 reserved number at the end of the probability change) To continue.

As a result, in the normal gaming state immediately after the end of the high probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state), the game control device 100 causes the special figure 2 start display winning memory generated in the high probability state to be displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game. When executing, as a special mode, it is possible to execute a game control different from that of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory generated in the normal game state. For example, as described above with reference to FIG. 129, the variation pattern of long variation (long variation time) is set immediately after the high-probability state (probability variation state) ends, even in the normal game state of the special figure 2 variation display game. Instead, a fluctuation pattern of short fluctuation (short fluctuation time) is set. Therefore, in the normal game state after the end of the probability change state (small hit RUSH state), the player stops the game and leaves the game machine 10, and a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game occurs in an unattended state. The possibility (the possibility of unmanned jackpot) can be reduced.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set special figure 2 effect mode number as an effect command (A20212), and executes effect command setting processing (A20213). Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A20214), and effect command setting processing is executed (A20215). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number (initial value) of the new special figure 2 production mode as a production command (A20216), and a production command setting process (A20217). ) Is executed. It is not necessary to set the number of high-probability fluctuations (initial value) in the new special figure 2 effect mode after the end of the probability variation state, and therefore the processes of steps A20216 and A20217 may not be executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the new special figure 2 effect mode is a left-handed mode (A20218), and when it is not the left-handed mode (the result of A20218 is "N"), the effect mode information check processing is performed. finish. In the case of a left-handed mode (result of A20218 is “Y”), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A20219), and an effect command setting process is executed (A20220) to produce an effect mode. The information check process ends.

Through the above process, the effect control device 300 that has received the probability information command indicating the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) executes the probability information setting process of setting the probability state and performing the process corresponding to the probability state. Yes (single-shot system command processing B1313, B1314). In addition, the production control device 300 which receives the production revolution number command can set the special figure 2 production remaining revolution number of the new special figure 2 production mode, and subsequently receives the decorative special figure 2 stop command as a command for the symbol stop. Each time the special figure 2 effect remaining rotational speed is updated by -1 (decrease by 1), the subsequent special figure 2 effect residual rotational speed can be managed. As a result, the effect control device 300 can switch the effect according to the switching (end) of the special figure 2 effect mode, or can perform the effect of notifying the change before the special figure 2 effect mode is switched. Furthermore, the production control device 300 that has received the high probability variation number command can set the high probability variation number (initial value) of the new special figure 2 production mode. The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handing instruction notification command can display a left-handing instruction display for instructing left-handing on the display device 41.

In this way, the game control device 100 is independent of the special figure 1 effect mode, and in accordance with the special figure 2 effect remaining revolution number corresponding to the number of revolutions (number of executions) of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 It is possible to manage the effect mode and execute game control corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode during the stay. Therefore, in the normal game state after the end of the probability change state (small hit RUSH state), the special mode can be set until the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 starting memory generated during the probability change state is completed. .. Further, during the special mode corresponding to the number of times the special display 2 variable display game is executed (for example, 4 times after the end of the positive change state), the special map based on the special figure 2 start memory (second start memory) generated during the positive change state. By setting a short-time variation pattern for the two-variation display game, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of unmanned big hits.

Further, the special figure 2 effect mode can be managed independently of the special figure 1 effect mode, and the effect control device 300 that has received the command corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode, for example, only specifies the particular special figure 2 effect mode. It is possible to control the execution of the effect corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode during the stay, such as generating an effect, and improve the enjoyment of the game. Moreover, since the transition from the high probability state to the normal game state is managed by the total effect remaining rotation speed instead of the special effect 2 effect remaining speed, the high probability state ends if only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The problem of not doing does not occur.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the fanfare/interval interval process transition setting process (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 displaying process and the special figure 2 displaying process. Note that the processes other than steps A5916 to A5918 are the same as the fanfare/inter-interval process shift setting process (FIG. 45) of the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

After step A5915, the game control device 100 saves the number of the effect mode 1 (for example, "1") in the special figure 1 effect mode number area and the special figure 2 effect mode number area (A5916). Then, the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed area, the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed area, and the total effect remaining rotation speed area are cleared (A5917). Subsequently, the non-updated code is saved in the special figure primary mode transition information area and the special figure secondary mode transition information area (A5917), and the fanfare/inter-interval processing transition setting processing ends. In this way, the effect mode 1 during the big hit state is set before the big hit state starts.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 big hit end processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process. The processing other than steps A6715a to A6715l is the same as the special figure 1 big hit end processing (FIG. 53) of the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6715, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table and the special figure 2 effect mode information address table (A6715a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode shift information and the special figure 2 effect mode shift information is acquired (A6715b). The special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308a-1 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number (A6715c). In the present embodiment, after the big hit state, the small hit RUSH state (probably changed state), so the special figure 1 effect mode number and special figure 2 effect mode number here, the small hit RUSH mode ( The numbers (for example, "2" and "12") corresponding to the probability variation mode).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) after the jackpot state ends (A6715d). As described above, in the present embodiment, the total effect remaining rotational speed is the predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, the high probability variation frequency (initial value) that is the rotational speed (or the number of games) that continues in the probability variation state (small hit RUSH state). Value)) is set. Then, the special figure primary mode transition information and special figure secondary mode transition information regarding the effect mode after the end of the big hit state are acquired and saved (A6715e). Here, the special figure secondary mode shift information is information for shifting to the special mode after the end of the probability variation state.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (high probability) corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (small hit RUSH mode, probability variation mode) as an effect command (A6715f), and effects command A setting process is executed (A6715g). Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) is prepared as an effect command (A6715h), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6715i).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation number (initial value) after the end of the big hit as an effect command (A6715j), and executes an effect command setting process (A6715k). Here, the number of high-probability fluctuations (initial value) is the same as the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) described above, and is a predetermined rotation speed (or number of games) that continues in the probability variation state (small hit RUSH state). It is set to the number of times (for example, 50 times). In the present embodiment, the single small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode) is used during the probability variation state, and the effect mode does not change. Therefore, the total effect remaining rotational speed (initial value) and the number of high-probability fluctuations (initial value). And the same. However, in the case of finely changing the effect mode even during the probability change state, the total effect remaining rotational speed (initial value) may be set smaller than the high-probability change frequency (initial value).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 effect mode shift information and the special figure 2 effect mode shift information are cleared (A6715l), and the process proceeds to step A6716.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process. The processing other than steps A6815a to A6815l is the same as the special figure 2 big hit end processing (FIG. 54) of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6815, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table and the special figure 2 effect mode information address table (A6815a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode shift information and the special figure 2 effect mode shift information is acquired (A6815b). The special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308b-1 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A6815c to A6815l and shifts to the processing of step A6816. Note that the processing of steps A6815c-A6815l has the same contents as the processing of steps A6715c-A6715l of the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

[Example of production mode transition]
FIG. 137(A) is a diagram showing an example of transition (transition, change) of the effect mode according to the third embodiment. The shift of the effect mode is performed based on the control of FIGS. 123 to 136 described above.

When the game state changes in the order of special game state (big hit state) → probability change state → normal game state, special figure 1 production mode is big hit mode → small hit RUSH mode (probability change mode) → normal mode in order. Transition. In addition, in the probability change state after the end of the special game state, the total number of remaining rotational speeds of the performance decreases as the total number of executions (total change number) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game increases. When it becomes zero, the special figure 1 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 131).

Further, even during the normal game state, each time the special figure 1 production remaining rotation speed decreases to zero in response to an increase in the number of executions of the special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 variation number), the special figure 1 The production mode sequentially shifts in the order of normal mode A→normal mode B→normal mode C→normal mode D→normal mode E→normal mode F→... (See FIG. 131). For example, the normal mode is switched every time the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 increases by 100 after the probability variation state ends.

As an example, the big hit mode, the small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), the normal mode A, the normal mode B, the normal mode C, the normal mode D, the normal mode E, the normal mode F, the special mode 1 production mode number is 1 respectively. To 8. It should be noted that the special figure 1 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be appropriately given.

In addition, when the game state shifts in the order of special game state (big hit state) → probability change state → normal game state, the special figure 2 effect mode is big hit mode → small hit RUSH mode (probability change mode) → special mode (special Production mode). In addition, in the probability change state after the end of the special game state, the total number of remaining rotational speeds of the performance decreases as the total number of executions (total change number) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game increases. When it becomes zero, the special figure 2 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 133).

Further, even during the normal game state, each time the special figure 2 production remaining rotation speed decreases to zero in response to an increase in the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation number), the special figure 2 The production mode sequentially shifts in the order of special mode→normal mode G→normal mode H→normal mode I→normal mode J→normal mode K→... (See FIG. 133). In the special mode (special effect mode), when the number of fluctuations in special figure 2 becomes larger than “4” which is the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 to be reserved (or the number of special figure 2 to be retained at the end of probable change) after the probability variation state, it is normal. Switch to mode G. The normal mode G continues until the number of changes in Toku-zu 2 reaches 200 after the end of the probability variation state, and after the normal mode G, the normal mode is switched every time the number of changes in Toku-zu 2 increases by 100.

As an example, the special figure 2 effect mode numbers of the big hit mode, the small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), the special mode, the normal mode G, the normal mode H, the normal mode I, the normal mode J, and the normal mode K are 1, respectively. 12, 50, 14-18. It should be noted that the special figure 2 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be appropriately given.

Since the special figure 1 effect mode and the special figure 2 effect mode are independently set, the effect control device 300 uses the special figure 1 effect mode in the display device 41, the board effect device 44 (movable accessory), and the like. There may be a problem in which one of the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 1 and the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 effect mode is prioritized (preferred). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 gives priority (preferential treatment) to the effect of the predetermined special figure variation display game as shown in FIG. 137(A).

In the small hit RUSH mode (probability change state, small hit RUSH state), the main starting area for winning the game ball is the second starting winning opening 37 (FIG. 2) and the sub starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, Since the main variation special map is a special figure 2 variable display game, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferred) and the player does not feel uncomfortable. For example, in the display device 41, in the small hit RUSH mode, the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged display (main display, normal display) with a large symbol, and the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is reduced display with small symbol (sub) Displayed) or not displayed.

On the contrary, in the normal mode (normal game state in which the number of fluctuations in special figure 2 is 5 or later), the main starting area for winning the game ball is the first starting winning opening 36 (FIG. 2) and the sub starting area is the second starting area. Since it is the winning hole 37, and the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the effect of the special figure 1 variation display game is prioritized (preferred) and the player does not feel uncomfortable. For example, in the display device 41, in the normal mode, the decorative special map 1 variable display game is enlarged display (large display, main display, normal display) with large symbols, and the decorative special map 2 variable display game is reduced display with small symbols (sub display) Or is not displayed.

In the special mode (the special game mode 2 in which the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4), the main starting area for winning the game ball is the first starting winning port 36 (FIG. 2), but the small hit RUSH mode (probably changing state). The special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 starting prize winning memory (special figure 2 hold) that has occurred during) is mainly executed. Therefore, in the special mode (special effect mode), although it is in the normal game state, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferred) and the player does not feel uncomfortable. For example, in the display device 41, in the special mode, the decoration special map 2 variable display game is enlarged display (main display, normal display) by a large symbol, and the decoration special map 1 variable display game is reduced display by a small symbol (sub display). Or is not displayed.

(Variation time)
FIG. 137(B) is a diagram showing an example of the variation time according to the third embodiment. The control of the variation time as the variation pattern is performed based on the control of FIGS. 123 to 136 described above.

In the probability change state, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game (that is, the special figure 1 variation time) is a long time (may be called a medium time) of 60 seconds (A4411). In the probability change state, the special figure 1 variation display game has no reach, and the special figure 1 variation time is not changed even with a high-probability final variation, so the special figure 1 variation time may be fixed. In addition, since the special figure 1 fluctuation time is a long time, when the high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game, it is obtained in the probability change state (small hit RUSH state) or the big hit state before the probability change state. It is possible to secure the time for displaying the number of prize balls and the like on the display device 41 by the effect control device 300. Further, the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game may be lengthened only for the high-probability final fluctuation to secure this time.

In the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game (that is, the special figure 1 variation time) varies depending on the presence/absence of reach, and is 3 seconds when there is no reach, and is longer when there is reach than when there is no reach. It is longer than 20 seconds (A4402). It should be noted that the higher the degree of expectation of the reach system (type), the longer the variation time, and the variation time of normal reach (N reach) is 20 sec, but it is longer than 20 sec in SP reach. In the normal game state, the special figure 1 variation time does not depend on whether the special figure 2 effect mode is the special mode.

Further, in the probability variation state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (that is, the special figure 2 variation time) is a short time of 1 sec in the basic case (when there is no reach and when there is no high-probability final variation). (A4502). However, in the case of reach, the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 becomes longer than the short fluctuation, which is medium and longer than 20 sec. It should be noted that the higher the degree of expectation of the reach system (type), the longer the variation time, and the variation time of normal reach (N reach) is 20 sec, but it is longer than 20 sec in SP reach. Further, the medium fluctuation time is shorter than the long fluctuation (for example, 10 minutes).

In addition, in the case of the high-probability final fluctuation started in the probability variation state, if there is no reach, the Toku-zu 2 fluctuation time is a medium 20 sec, which is longer than 1 sec in the case of no high-probability final fluctuation (high probability It is not limited to this if it is longer than the last fluctuation). In the case of the high probability final fluctuation that started in the probability variation state, when there is reach, the special figure 2 fluctuation time is longer than the short fluctuation and is 20 sec or more, which is longer than that of the short fluctuation. .. In this way, since the special figure 2 variation time is a medium time, when the high-probability final variation is the special figure 2 variation display game, the probability variation state (small hit RUSH state) or the big hit before the probability variation state It is possible to secure the time for displaying the number of prize balls obtained in the state on the display device 41 by the effect control device 300. Further, the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game may be lengthened only for the high-probability final fluctuation to secure this time.

In the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (that is, the special figure 2 variation time) differs depending on whether the special figure 2 effect mode is the special mode or not (A4506a, A4502). In the special mode, the special map 2 variation time is the same as the special figure 2 variation time in the probability variation state (provided that it is not a high-probability final variation) even in the normal game state (the same degree). It may be different if there is one). That is, in the special mode, the special figure 2 fluctuation time is 1 second in a short time when there is no reach, and when there is a reach, it is 20 seconds or more, which is a medium length, which is longer than the short fluctuation. Shorter (eg 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal game state after the end of the probability change state (small hit RUSH state), the player stops the game and leaves the game machine 10, and a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game occurs in an unattended state. The possibility (the possibility of unmanned jackpot) can be reduced.

In the normal game state when not in the special mode, the special figure 2 variation time is a variation time (10 minutes) longer than in the special mode or the probability variation state. As described above, if the special figure 2 variable display game is a long-term variation (long variation) having a long variation time, the special figure depends on the big hit or the small hit that occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during the long-term variation. The two-variation display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped. As a result, unless the special figure 2 effect mode is the special mode, the player's right-handed profit in the normal game state is reduced.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 138 is a screen transition diagram showing a screen transition of the display device 41 when the small hit RUSH mode in the probability changing state is changed to the normal mode through the special mode in the third embodiment.

In (a), the effect mode display 680 indicating the effect mode is displayed as "rush mode" indicating the small hit RUSH mode. Note that, as shown in FIG. 137(A), in the probability change state (small hit RUSH state, small hit rush state), the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferred) on the display device 41, and the special figure 2 variable display. Since the game effect is prioritized (preferred), this "rush mode" is displayed as the special figure 2 effect mode.

Further, in (a), in the probability changing state, the special figure 2 variable display game by winning the second starting winning opening 37 which is the main starting area is displayed in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen in an enlarged display (main (Display) is being executed. In addition, the special figure 1 variable display game due to winning in the first start winning opening 36 which is the sub-starting area is stopped as a reduced display (sub display) in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, and is lost. The stop symbol "4, 1, 5" is displayed small. The special figure variation display game due to winning in the main starting area may be referred to as a main variation display game (main variation special figure), and the special figure variation display game due to winning in the sub starting area is a sub variation display game. It may be called (subordinate variation special map). It should be noted that the special figure 2 variation display game which is changing here is a high-probability final variation (final variation in the probability variation state).

The first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the special state 2 variable display game execution state is shown. The second predetermined image 676 indicating “” is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (is changing). The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

In the first display portion 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game is not currently displayed. On the other hand, in the second display portion 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 hold display 630a corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed as the hold display before the digestion. Four are displayed. The four special figure 2 hold displays 630a correspond to the hold occurring in the high probability state before the high probability final change. In the pending consumption area 640, the special figure 2 pending display 630b is displayed as a starting memory display (changing pending display) corresponding to the starting memory for the variable display game being executed. Even if the special figure 1 hold is generated, the special figure 2 hold display 630a is given priority (preferential treatment) to the special figure 1 hold display 620a on the display screen, and the special figure 1 hold display 620a is displayed on the first display unit 620. May not be displayed.

Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "0", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "4".

Next, in (i), the special display 2 variable display game of high-probability final fluctuation is stopped in the variable display area 610, and the out-of-stop symbols “3, 4, 6” of the special map 2 variable display game are displayed in large size The probability change state (small hitting RUSH state) is terminated at the same time. The second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game changes to a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. The other display is the same as (a).

Then, in (u), after the probability change state, the game state shifts to the normal game state, but as shown in FIG. 137(A), the special figure 1 effect mode shifts from the small hit RUSH mode to the normal mode A, and the special figure 2 The effect mode shifts from the small hit RUSH mode to the special mode. Then, since the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferential treatment), as the effect mode display 680, "chance zone" indicating the special mode is displayed. Since the game is in the normal game state, a left-handed display for recommending left-handed play to the player may be displayed.

Further, in (U), the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the hold generated based on the winning (establishment of the second starting condition) to the second starting winning opening 37 in the high probability state is the normal gaming state. Start. However, because of the special mode, as described above, the variation time of this special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation time) is shorter than long variation (for example, 10 minutes), and for example, if there is no reach, the variation time is short. It is 1 sec, and in the case of reach, it is medium and long 20 sec which is longer than the short fluctuation.

Further, during the change of the special figure 2 variable display game, the player left-handed in the normal game state, so that the hold that is generated based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (establishment of the first starting condition) The special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to is started. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state. As described above, in the special mode, although it is in the normal game state, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferred), and the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen. It is executed as an enlarged display (main display). On the other hand, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed as a reduced display (sub display) in the variable display area 613 at the left end. In this way, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The first predetermined image 675 indicating the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is indicated by the symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game is indicated by the symbol “◯”. Has become.

On the second display portion 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 hold display 630a is shifted to the right, and three special figure 2 hold displays 630a are displayed. In the pending digestion area 640, the special figure 2 pending display 630b is displayed as a starting memory display (changing pending display) corresponding to the starting memory relating to the running special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, in the hold exhaustion area 640, the special figure 2 hold display 630b is displayed as a pending display during change with priority (preferential treatment). Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "0", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "3".

Subsequently, in (e), the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped, and the out-of-stop symbol “8, 1, 3” of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in a large size. The second predetermined image 676 changes to a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. The other display is the same as (U).

After that, similarly, the hold generated based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 in the high probability state is exhausted twice, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed twice. During this time, the special mode continues.

Next, in (o), the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the last hold generated based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 in the high probability state is started in the normal gaming state. However, because of the special mode, as described above, the variation time of this special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation time) is shorter than long variation (for example, 10 minutes), and for example, if there is no reach, the variation time is short. It is 1 sec, and in the case of reach, it is medium and long 20 sec which is longer than the short fluctuation.

The first predetermined image 675 indicating the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is indicated by the symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game is indicated by the symbol “◯”. Has become. In the second display portion 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 hold display 630a before the digestion is not displayed. In the pending consumption area 640, a special figure 2 pending display 630b (changing pending display) is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number “0”, and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number “0”.

Then, in (), the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped, and the out-of-stop symbol "5, 7, 2" of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in large size. Then, the special mode ends. The second predetermined image 676 changes to a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. The other display is the same as (o).

Next, in (ki), the normal mode starts after the special mode ends in the normal game state. In the normal game state after the special mode ends, the effect of the special map 1 variable display game is prioritized (preferred), and the special figure 1 variable display game that continues from (U) displays the variable display at the center of the display screen. In the area 610, it is executed as an enlarged display (main display). On the other hand, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed as a reduced display (sub display) in the variable display area 615 at the right end.

On the first display portion 620 of the display screen, one special figure 1 hold display 620a corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed as a hold display before digestion. It is displayed. In the reserved digestion area 640, the special figure 1 reserved display 620b is displayed as a changing pending display. Even if the special figure 2 hold occurs, the special figure 1 hold display 620a is given priority (preferential treatment) over the special figure 2 hold display 630a on the display screen, and the special figure 2 hold display 630a is displayed on the second display unit 630. May not be displayed.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
With reference to FIGS. 139 to 150, the gaming machine 10 in the modification of the third embodiment will be described. Note that this modification applies the same configuration as that of the above-described third embodiment to the second embodiment, but the configurations not described in this variation are the configurations of the third embodiment, A configuration common to the configuration of the second embodiment (including the configuration of the first embodiment not described in the second embodiment) is also applicable. Although not described below, the control of FIGS. 123 to 127, FIG. 130, FIG. 132, and FIG. 134 described above can be applied to the modified example.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 139 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transition of the game state in the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 139 is a summary of each game state, in which the control by the game control device 100 in each game state, the control by the effect control device 300, and the features in the game state are shown. In this modified example, the game state includes a normal game state, a specific game state A, and a specific game state B.

FIG. 139 corresponds to FIG. 93 of the second embodiment, but in the modified example of the third embodiment, the special figure 1 is obtained due to the winning of the prize hole (universal prize hole) of the ordinary variable prize device 33. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed instead of the variable display game.

The normal game state is the same as the normal game state of FIG. 93 of the second embodiment. The specific game state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) is the same as the second specific game state of FIG. The specific game state B (time saving state) is basically the same as the third specific game state of FIG. 93, but in the present modified example, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed by winning the prize at the Poden prize hole. Therefore, the main variation special figure (main variation display game) becomes the special figure 2 variation display game. Further, in FIG. 139, there is no specific game state corresponding to the first specific game state of FIG. 93.

When the probability variation big hit occurs in the normal game state or the specific game state B (time saving state), the game state shifts from the normal game state to the specific game state A after the big hit state ends. Further, the specific game state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) is continued until the next big hit, so the high probability variation number update process does not have to be executed.

[Game board]
FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board 30 in the modification of the third embodiment. In FIG. 140, the position of the normal variation winning device 33 is changed from that of FIG. 91 of the second embodiment, and the normal variation winning device 33 is located above the second starting winning opening 37 and the second special variation winning device 39, that is, in the second position. It is provided on the upstream side of the downward direction of the game ball with respect to the 2 start winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38, and the second special variation winning device 39. Therefore, in the specific game state B (time saving state), even if a game ball is won in the prize opening (Hoden prize opening) of the normal variation winning device 33 by the Poden support and a small hit occurs, a small hit. At times, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are not substantially won.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing according to the modification of the third embodiment. 141 is the same as FIG. 128 except for the contents of step A4401.

In step A4401 of FIG. 141, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time saving state or the high probability state. If neither the time saving state nor the high probability state (in the normal gaming state) (result of A4401 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A4402 and thereafter. If it is in the time saving state or the high probability state (result of A4401 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4408 and subsequent steps.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process according to the modification of the third embodiment. 142 is the same as FIG. 129 except for the contents of step A4501.

In step A4501 of FIG. 142, the game control device 100 determines whether it is the time saving state or the high probability state. If it is the time saving state or the high probability state (result of A4501 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4502 and subsequent steps.

If neither the time saving state nor the high probability state (in the normal gaming state) (the result of A4501 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A4504 and thereafter, and the special figure 2 effect mode number is the special mode number (specific number here). If it is not 50) (the result of A4506a is "N"), the variation pattern of long variation (long variation time, for example, 10 minutes) is set in the special figure 2 variation display game. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 effect mode number is the special mode number (specific number 50 here) (result of A4506a is "Y"), the special figure 2 variable display game is shorter than long variation. A fluctuation pattern of short fluctuation (short fluctuation time, for example, 1 sec) is set (step A4502 and thereafter).

[Special figure 1 production mode information check processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 effect mode information check processing according to the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 143 is the same as FIG. 131 except for the contents of steps A20102 and A20116.

In step A20102 of FIG. 143, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is started in a time saving state or a high probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state). When the special figure 1 variable display game is started in a time saving state or a high probability state (the result of A20102 is “Y”), the special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variation that are necessary until the production mode is changed The total effect remaining rotation speed, which is the total rotation speed of the display game, is updated by -1, and it is determined whether the total effect remaining rotation speed is 0 (A20103, A20104). In this modified example, at the start of the time saving state (at the end of the big hit), the total remaining production rotational speed is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, the number of time saving changes (initial value)) that is the number of times the time saving state continues. .. It should be noted that the number of continuations is the number of times that continuation is possible, and when a big hit occurs, the time saving state ends.

However, in this modification, since the gaming machine 10 is not an ST machine, the number of times the high-probability state can be continued is up to the next big hit and is infinite unless the big hit occurs. ), the total remaining number of revolutions is set to an extremely large number (for example, 50,000). As a result, in the high probability state (probability variation state), the total remaining production rotational speed does not become 0, the special figure 1 production mode does not change until the next big hit, and the small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode) is maintained. At the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), it is also possible to set the total effect remaining rotation speed to about 100 and make the gaming machine 10 an ST machine. In addition, just before the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), the special mode primary mode transition information is set to a code without update (the result of A20101 is “Y”), and the high-probability state is continued until the next big hit. Good.

In the time saving state, when the total remaining production rotation speed is 0 (the result of A20104 is “Y”), that is, when the time saving state (universal power support) ends, the special drawing 1 of the special production mode 1 A performance mode number or the like is set (A20107-A20120).

In step A20116 of FIG. 143, the game control device 100, the new special figure 1 effect mode time saving fluctuation frequency (initial value) or high probability fluctuation frequency corresponding to the high probability fluctuation frequency command (initial value) Is prepared as a production command. Then, the effect command setting process (A20117) is executed. After the end of the time saving state or the probability changing state, it is not necessary to set the number of time saving fluctuations (initial value) or the number of high probability fluctuations (initial value) in the new special figure 1 effect mode, and therefore, the processes of steps A20116 and A20117 are executed. You don't have to.

[Special figure 2 production mode information check processing]
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 effect mode information check processing according to the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 144 is the same as FIG. 132 except for the contents of steps A20202 and A20216 from FIG.

In step A20202 of FIG. 144, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is started in a time saving state or a high probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state). Special figure 2 When the variable display game is started in a time saving state or a high probability state (the result of A20202 is "Y"), the total effect remaining rotation speed is updated by -1, and the total effect remaining rotation speed is 0. It is determined whether there is any (A20203, A20204).

In this modified example, at the start of the time-saving state (at the end of the big hit), the total remaining number of revolutions is set to a predetermined number (for example, 50 times, the number of time-saving changes (initial value)) that is the number of times the time-saving state can be continued. There is. On the other hand, at the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), the total effect remaining rotation speed is set to an impossible number (for example, 50,000 times). As a result, in the high-probability state (probability variation state), the total effect remaining rotation speed does not become 0, the special figure 2 effect mode is not changed until the next big hit, and the small hit RUSH mode (probability change mode) is maintained. In addition, just before the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), the special figure secondary mode transition information is set to a code without update (the result of A20101 is “Y”), and the high-probability state is continued until the next big hit. Good.

In the time saving state, when the total remaining production rotational speed is 0 (the result of A20204 is “Y”), that is, when the time saving state (universal power support) ends, the special figure 2 of the special production mode 2 A performance mode number or the like is set (A20207-A20220).

In addition, in the time saving state, when the total effect remaining rotation speed is 0 (the result of A20204 is “Y”), that is, when the time saving state ends, in step A20209, the special figure of the special figure 2 effect mode to be shifted to. The 2 effect mode number becomes the number of the special mode (specific number 50 here), and the special figure 2 effect mode shifts to the special mode. Then, in step A20210, the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the special figure 2 effect mode (special mode) to be shifted becomes the upper limit value "4" of the special figure 2 holding number (A3015 in FIG. 123). .. The special figure 2 effect remaining rotational speed (initial value) may be set to the current special figure 2 holding number at the end of the time saving state. Therefore, the special mode continues until the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is within a predetermined number of times (here, the upper limit value "4" of the special figure 2 holding number or the special figure 2 holding number at the time saving end) after the end of the time saving. To do.

As a result, in the normal game state immediately after the end of the time saving state, the game control device 100 normally uses the special mode as the special mode when executing the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 starting winning memory generated in the time saving state. A game control different from that of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory generated in the game state can be executed. For example, based on the above-mentioned FIG. 142, the variation pattern of long variation (long variation time) is not set even in the normal game state of the special figure 2 variation display game immediately after the end of the time saving state, and short variation (short variation). Time) fluctuation pattern is set.

In step A20216 of FIG. 144, the game control device 100, the special short time variation number command or high probability variation number command corresponding to the time saving variation number (initial value) or high probability variation number (initial value) of the special figure 2 effect mode Is prepared as a production command. Then, the effect command setting process (A20117) is executed. After the end of the time saving state or the probability changing state, it is not necessary to set the number of time saving changes (initial value) or the number of high probability changes (initial value) in the new special figure 2 effect mode, so the processes of steps A20216 and A20217 are executed. You don't have to.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the modification of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process according to the modification of the third embodiment. In addition, FIG. 146 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process according to the modification of the third embodiment.

In FIG. 145, the processes of steps A16717a to A16717l are executed between steps A16717 and A16718, but the other processes are the same as those of FIG. 99 of the second embodiment except A16706, A16708, A16716, and A16717. The processes of steps A16717a-A16717l are basically the same as steps A6715a-A6715l of FIG.

Since there is no universal electric power support in the specific game state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state), in FIG. 145, the game control device 100 outputs a signal related to the start with high probability & no time saving in step A16706. Save to the data area. In Step A16708, the signal related to the start with high probability and no reduction in time is saved in the test signal output data area. In step A16716, the high probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. In step A16717, the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations (for example, 50,000 times) is saved in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region for holding the number of high-probability fluctuations, but the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations is not saved.

In FIG. 145, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table and the special figure 2 effect mode information address table after step A16717 (A16717a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode shift information and the special figure 2 effect mode shift information is acquired (A16717b). The special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308a-1 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, and are information for making a transition to the probability change state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number (A16717c). In addition, here, since it is determined by A16705 that the small hit RUSH state (probability change state) is reached after the big hit state ends (result of step A16705 is “N”), the special figure 1 effect mode number here, and The special mode 2 effect mode number is a number corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode) (for example, "2" and "12").

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the total effect remaining rotational speed (initial value) after the jackpot state ends (A16717d). As described above, in this modification, the gaming machine 10 is not an ST machine, and therefore the number of times the high-probability state can be continued is infinite unless a big hit occurs. The total effect remaining rotation speed is set to an enormous number of times (for example, 50,000 times). Then, the special figure primary mode transition information and special figure secondary mode transition information related to the effect mode after the end of the big hit state are acquired and saved (A16717e). Since the high-probability state continues until the next big hit, the special figure primary mode transition information and the special figure secondary mode transition information may be set to the no-update code as described above.

The processing of the next steps A16717f-A16717l is the same as steps A6715f-A6715l of FIG.

In FIG. 146, the processes of steps A16731a to A16731l are executed between steps A16731 and A16732, but the others are the same as those in FIG. 100 of the second embodiment.

After step A16731, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table and the special figure 2 effect mode information address table (A16731a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode shift information and the special figure 2 effect mode shift information is acquired (A16731b). Note that the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308a-1 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing, and are information for transitioning to the time saving state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number (A16731c). In addition, here, because it is determined by A16705 that the time is short after the big hit state ends (the result of step A16705 is "Y"), the special figure 1 effect mode number and special figure 2 effect mode here. The numbers are numbers (for example, "32" and "42") corresponding to the time saving state (time saving mode).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) after the jackpot state ends (A16731d). As described above, in the present modification, the total effect remaining rotation speed is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, the number of time saving fluctuations (initial value)) that is the number of rotations (or the number of games) in which the time saving state continues. .. Then, the special figure primary mode transition information and special figure secondary mode transition information regarding the effect mode after the end of the big hit state are acquired and saved (A16731e). Here, the special figure secondary mode shift information is information for shifting to the special mode after the end of the time saving state.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (indicating a time saving mode) as an effect command (A16731f), and executes effect command setting processing. (A16731g). Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) is prepared as an effect command (A16731h), and effect command setting processing is executed (A16731i).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a time saving variation number command corresponding to the time saving variation number (initial value) after the end of the big hit as an effect command (A16731j), and executes an effect command setting process (A16731k). Here, the number of time saving fluctuations (initial value) is the same as the above total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value), and is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) that is the number of continuous rotations (or the number of games) in the time saving state. It is set to the number of hourly fluctuations (initial value). In this modified example, since the single time saving mode is set during the time saving state and the effect mode does not change, the total effect remaining rotational speed (initial value) and the time saving variation number (initial value) are the same. However, when the effect mode is finely changed even during the time saving state, the total effect remaining rotational speed (initial value) may be set smaller than the time saving variation frequency (initial value).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 effect mode shift information and the special figure 2 effect mode shift information are cleared (A16731l), and the process proceeds to step A16732.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the modification of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process according to the modification of the third embodiment. In addition, FIG. 148 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process according to the modification of the third embodiment.

In FIG. 147, the processing of steps A16817a to A168817l is executed between steps A16817 and A16818, but other than that, it is the same as FIG. 101 of the second embodiment except for A16806, A16808, A168816, and A16817. The processing of steps A16817a-A16817l is the same as the processing of steps A16717a-A16717l of FIG. 145, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

Since there is no universal electric power support in the specific game state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state), in FIG. 147, the game control device 100 outputs a high probability & start time signal without external information in step A16806. Save to the data area. In Step A16808, the signal related to the start with high probability and no time saving is saved in the test signal output data area. At step A16816, the high probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. In step A16817, the initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations (for example, 50,000 times) is saved in the high-probability fluctuation number area for holding the number of high-probability fluctuations, but the initial value of the number of time saving fluctuations is not saved.

In FIG. 148, the processes of steps A16831a-A16831l are executed between steps A16831 and A16832, but the others are the same as those of FIG. 102 of the second embodiment. The processing of steps A16831a-A16831l is the same as the processing of steps A16731a-A16731l of FIG. 146, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Example of production mode transition (modification)]
FIG. 149(A) is a diagram showing an example of transition (transition, change) of the effect mode according to the modification of the third embodiment. The shift of the effect mode is performed based on the control of FIGS. 141 to 148 described above.

The game state shifts in the order of special game state (big hit state) → specific game state A (probable variation state, small hit RUSH state) → special game state (big hit state) → specific game state B (time saving state) → normal game state In this case, the special figure 1 effect mode sequentially shifts to a big hit mode, a small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), a big hit mode, a time saving mode, and a normal mode. In addition, in the time saving state after the end of the special game state (big hit state), the total effect remaining rotation corresponding to the increase in the total number of executions (total variation number) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game When the number decreases to zero, the special figure 1 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 143).

Further, even during the normal game state, each time the special figure 1 production remaining rotation speed decreases to zero in response to an increase in the number of executions of the special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 variation number), the special figure 1 The effect mode sequentially shifts in the order of normal mode A→normal mode B→normal mode C→normal mode D→normal mode E→normal mode F→... (See FIG. 143). For example, the normal mode is switched every time the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 increases by 100 after the probability variation state ends.

As an example, the special figure 1 production mode number of big hit mode, small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), normal mode A, normal mode B, normal mode C, normal mode D, normal mode E, normal mode F, time saving mode, 1 to 8 and 32, respectively. It should be noted that the special figure 1 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be appropriately given.

In addition, the gaming state is in the order of special gaming state (big hit state) → specific gaming state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) → special gaming state (big hit state) → specific gaming state B (time saving state) → normal gaming state When the shift is made, the special figure 2 effect mode is sequentially shifted in the order of big hit mode→small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode)→big hit mode→time saving mode→special mode (special effect mode). In addition, in the time saving state after the end of the special game state (big hit state), the total effect remaining rotation corresponding to the increase in the total number of executions (total variation number) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game When the number decreases to zero, the special figure 2 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 144).

Further, even during the normal game state, each time the special figure 2 production remaining rotation speed decreases to zero in response to an increase in the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 variation number), the special figure 2 The production mode sequentially shifts in the order of special mode→normal mode G→normal mode H→normal mode I→normal mode J→normal mode K→normal mode L→... (See FIG. 144). In the special mode (special effect mode), when the special map 2 fluctuation count becomes larger than “4” which is the upper limit value of the special map 2 hold number (or the special map 2 hold number at the time of the probability change end) after the time saving state ends, Switch to mode G. The normal mode G continues until the number of special figure 2 fluctuations reaches 100 after the probability variation state ends, and after the normal mode G, the normal mode switches every time the number of special figure 2 fluctuations increases by 100.

As an example, special figure 2 production mode of big hit mode, small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), time saving mode, special mode, normal mode G, normal mode H, normal mode I, normal mode J, normal mode K, normal mode L The numbers are 1, 12, 42, 50, 43-48, respectively. It should be noted that the special figure 2 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be appropriately given.

In this modification, the effect control device 300 gives priority (preferential treatment) to the effect of a predetermined special figure variation display game as shown in FIG. 137(A).

In the small hit RUSH mode (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) and the time saving mode, the main starting area in which the game ball should be won is the second starting winning opening 37 or the normal variation winning device 33, and the sub starting area is the first starting winning prize. Since it is the mouth 36 and the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game, the effect of the special figure 2 variation display game is prioritized (preferred). For example, in the display device 41, in the small hit RUSH mode or the time saving mode, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged display (main display, normal display) by the large symbol, and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is reduced by the small symbol. Display (sub display) or not displayed.

On the contrary, in the normal mode (normal game state in which the number of fluctuations in special figure 2 is 5 or later), the main starting area for winning the game ball is the first starting winning opening 36 (FIG. 2) and the sub starting area is the second starting area. It is the winning opening 37 or the normal variation winning device 33, and since the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the effect of the special figure 1 variation display game is given priority (preferred). For example, in the display device 41, in the normal mode, the decorative special map 1 variable display game is enlarged display (large display, main display, normal display) with large symbols, and the decorative special map 2 variable display game is reduced display with small symbols (sub display) Or is not displayed.

In the special mode (Special figure 2 normal game state where the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4), the main starting area for winning the game ball is the first starting winning opening 36 (FIG. 2), The special figure 2 variable display game based on the FIG. 2 starting prize winning memory (special figure 2 hold) is mainly executed. Therefore, in the special mode (special effect mode), although in the normal game state, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferred). For example, in the display device 41, in the special mode, the decoration special map 2 variable display game is enlarged display (main display, normal display) by a large symbol, and the decoration special map 1 variable display game is reduced display by a small symbol (sub display). Or is not displayed.

At the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), it is possible to set the total effect remaining rotation speed to an initial value of about 100 times and use the gaming machine 10 as an ST machine, but in this case, The special figure 1 effect mode may enter the normal mode and the special figure 2 effect mode may enter the special mode after the probability change state (small hit RUSH state) ends.

[Variation time (variant)]
FIG. 149(B) is a diagram showing an example of the variation time according to the modification of the third embodiment. The control of the fluctuation time as the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the control described above. Even in the time-shortened state, the fluctuation time is the same as that in the probability-changed state except for the final fluctuation. There is no distinction between the final fluctuation and the final fluctuation in the fluctuation time of the probability change state. Others are the same as those in FIG. 137(B). Note that different time periods may be set for the time-saving state and the probability variation state.

[Screen transition diagram (modified example)]
FIG. 150 is a screen transition diagram showing a screen transition of the display device 41 when the time-saving state (time-saving mode) goes through the special mode and becomes the normal mode in the modification of the third embodiment. Except that (a') is the time saving mode and (ii) is the end of the final fluctuation of the time saving state, (u) to (ki) are the same as those in FIG. 38, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the modified example of the third embodiment, in the normal game state after the end of the time saving state, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 starting memory generated during the time saving state is completed. Special mode can be set. Furthermore, during the special mode corresponding to the number of times the special display 2 variable display game is executed (for example, 4 times after the end of the probability change state), the special map based on the special display 2 start memory (second start memory) generated during the time saving state By setting a short-time variation pattern for the two-variation display game, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of unmanned big hits.

[Operation and effect of the third embodiment]
In the third embodiment and its modified example, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display device based on the satisfaction of the start condition. When the result of the display game is a special result, it is possible to generate a special game state in which a game value can be given to the player. The game control means (game control device 100) controls the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition, first control means (special figure 1 game processing). And a second control means (special figure 2 game process) for controlling execution of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on establishment of the second start condition. It is possible to bring both the first variable display game by the first control means and the second variable display game by the second control means into the running state. The first control means can set the variation pattern of the first variable display game according to the number of executions of the first variable display game, and the second control means can set the second variation pattern according to the number of executions of the second variable display game. It is possible to set the variation pattern of the variation display game.

According to such a gaming machine 10, a specific mode (special mode) corresponding to the number of times of execution of one variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) (for example, four times after the end of the probability variation mode or after the time saving mode) ), the one variable display game (for example, the special figure) based on the start memory (for example, special figure 2 start memory, second start memory) that occurred before entering a specific mode (for example, during the probability variation mode or the time saving mode). It is possible to set a short-time fluctuation pattern for the two-variation display game). This can reduce the possibility that a special game state (big hit) will occur in an unmanned state. In addition, when the variation patterns of the first variable display game and the second variable display game are set according to the total number of times of execution of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, such a specific mode (special mode) is set. Only for one variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) based on the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 starting memory, second starting memory) that occurred before entering (for example, during the probability variation mode or time saving mode) However, it becomes difficult to set a fluctuation pattern for a short time during a specific mode.

In the third embodiment and its modification, the game control means (game control device 100) has a specific game state different from the special game state (for example, a probability variation state, a small hit RUSH state, a time saving state), and a specific game state A normal game state can be generated. The second control means sets a long-term fluctuation pattern for the second fluctuation display game based on the establishment of the second start condition in the normal gaming state. The second control means, when the second variable display game is executed in the normal game state, sets a short-term variation pattern for the second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition in the specific game state. Set.

According to such a gaming machine 10, during a specific mode (special mode) according to the number of executions of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (for example, four times after the end of the specific game state) , A short-time fluctuation pattern is set for the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 starting memory, second starting memory) generated during the specific game state. As a result, in the normal gaming state after the specific gaming state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a special gaming state (big hit) will occur in an unmanned state.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game is provided. The 1st control means can set the 1st production mode (special figure 1 production mode) according to the frequency|count of execution of a 1st floating display game, and changes the variation pattern of a 1st floating display game according to 1st production mode. Set. The 2nd control means can set the 2nd production mode (special figure 2 production mode) according to the frequency|count of execution of a 2nd floating display game, and changes the variation pattern of a 2nd floating display game according to 2nd production mode. Set. The effect control means (effect control device 300) executes the second variable display game in the normal game state based on the establishment of the second start condition in the specific game state (eg, probability variation state, small hit RUSH state, time saving state). In this case, the effect corresponding to the second effect mode is prioritized (preferred) and executed over the first effect mode.

According to such a gaming machine 10, even when the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is the main variable display game in the normal game state, the first variation display game based on the establishment of the second start condition in the specific game state. When the 2 variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed in the normal game state, the second effect mode (special figure 2 effect mode) relating to the second variable display game is executed with priority (preferential treatment). Because it is noticeable, it does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the third embodiment and its modification, the game control means (game control device 100) changes the game state (for example, the probability variation state, the time saving state) after the end of the special game state to the first variation during the game state. The control is performed according to the total number of executions of the display game and the second variable display game (that is, the total number of executions of the first variable display game and the second variable display game).

According to such a gaming machine 10, there is no problem that the game state does not shift (change) when only one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is being executed.

In the third embodiment and its modification, at least one of the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) and the second gaming state (specific gaming state (probably changing state or time saving state)) can be generated after the end of the special gaming state. Is. The game control means controls the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening 36), and the second start. Execution control of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is performed based on the establishment of a condition (for example, winning in the second starting winning opening 37 or the normal variable winning device 33). The game control means can bring both the first variable display game and the second variable display game into a running state. The effect control means (effect control device 300), in the first game state (for example, the normal game state), the first effect (decorative special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 1 hold display 620a, etc.) related to the first variable display game. ) Can be executed with priority (preferential treatment), and in the second game state (specific game state), the second effect (decorative special figure 2 variable display game, special figure 2 hold display 630a) related to the second variable display game. Etc.) can be executed with priority (preferential treatment). The effect control means can execute the second effect related to the second variable display game with priority (preferential treatment) over the first effect under the predetermined condition even in the first game state. Note that the predetermined condition may be a special mode or a case where the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is a big hit.

According to such a gaming machine 10, even in the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), the second variable display game is frequently executed (special mode), and the second variable display game is a big hit, which is important. If there is, the second effect related to the second variable display game can be executed with priority (preferential treatment) over the first effect. For this reason, the effect can be flexibly executed, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is obvious that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. It is also possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 30 Gaming Board 32 Gaming Area 33 Ordinary Variation Winning Device
36 1st Start Prize Port (1st Start Prize Area)
37 2nd starting prize hole (2nd starting prize area)
38 1st special variation winning device 39 2nd special variation winning device 41 Display device 44 Board production device 46 Board decoration device 100 Game control device (main board)
300 Production control device (sub board)

Claims (1)

The variation display includes: game control means capable of executing a variation display game in which identification information is variably displayed on a display device based on establishment of a start condition; In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a player can be provided with a gaming value when a game result is a special result,
After the special game state ends, at least one of the first game state and the second game state can be generated,
The game control means,
The execution control of the first variable display game is performed based on the establishment of the first start condition,
The execution control of the second variable display game is performed based on the establishment of the second start condition,
It is possible to bring both the first variable display game and the second variable display game into a running state,
The effect control means,
In the first gaming state, the first effect related to the first variable display game can be preferentially executed.
In the second game state, the second effect related to the second variable display game can be preferentially executed.
A game machine characterized in that, under a predetermined condition, the second effect related to the second variable display game can be preferentially executed even in the first game state.